JP2020006200A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in game interest.SOLUTION: A game machine for executing a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on satisfaction of a start condition and generating a state advantageous to a player when the game result of the is a special result includes: a movable performance device (first lower movable member, second lower movable member, movable member unit, first upper movable member, second upper movable member, first center movable performance member, second center movable performance member, third center movable performance member, fourth center movable performance member) for executing a predetermined performance operation; and performance control means (performance control device) for controlling the operation of the movable performance device. The performance control means performs an initial operation of the movable performance device on the basis of power supply.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 142

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on establishment of a start condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (symbols, symbols, etc.) displayed on the variable display device provided in the game area based on the fact that a game ball wins at the start port provided in the game area (start winning). ) Can be stored up to a predetermined number of start memories, which are the execution right of the variable display game for variable display. Then, the variable display game is executed based on the stored start memory, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened is set. It is also possible to change the probability of a special result upon derivation of a special result or the like. Further, it is possible to execute a pre-reading effect of performing a preliminary determination on the start memory before executing the variable display game based on the start memory and notifying the player of the determination result (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-77179 A

  If the game state or the effect state changes, and contradiction occurs between the content that has been announced and the content that is actually executed, the interest of the game may be reduced. An object of the present invention is to prevent a decrease in interest in a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result,
A movable staging device that performs a predetermined staging operation,
Effect control means for controlling the operation of the movable effect device,
The effect control means performs an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the fall of the interest of a game can be prevented.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the game board. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the back component. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the lower movable role unit. It is a front view explaining operation of the 1st lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is a front view of an upper movable character unit. It is a front view explaining operation of an upper movable character unit. It is a front view explaining operation of an upper movable character unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the central movable auditorium unit. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a center movable role unit, (a) is a front view, (b) is a back view. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a center movable role unit, (a) is a front view, (b) is a back view. It is a front view of a special fluctuation winning device. It is a top view of a special fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of an opening / closing member, (a) is a closed state, (b) is an open state. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the special fluctuation winning device. It is a rear view of a front wall member. It is a figure which shows a back wall member, (a) is a front view, (b) is a back view. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the main body. It is the figure seen from the left explaining the operation | movement of an opening / closing member unit, (a) is a closed state, (b) is an open state. It is a figure which shows an opening / closing member, (a) is a top view, (b) is a front view. (A) It is a front view of an opening-and-closing member unit, (b) It is AA sectional drawing. It is a bottom view explaining operation | movement of an opening / closing member unit, (a) is a closed state, (b) is an open state. It is a top view explaining the flow-down aspect of a game ball in a special fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining the falling mode of the game ball in the special fluctuation winning device, (a) is a top view, (b) is a perspective view seen from the right. It is a figure explaining a flow mode of a game ball in a special fluctuation winning device, and is a perspective view seen from the left. It is a front view explaining the falling mode of the game ball in the special fluctuation winning device, (a) is a closed state, (b) is an open state. It is a figure explaining behavior of a game ball at the time of opening an opening-and-closing member. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. 9 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure suspension information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure ordinary process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure changing process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the time reduction change frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining an effect mode information check process. It is a flowchart explaining fanfare / interval process shift setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the process change setting process during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during opening of a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2. (A) is a flowchart explaining the small hit fanfare middle processing, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the small hit middle processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a small hitting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit operation | movement setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process shift setting process. (A) is a flowchart illustrating a small hit remaining ball process, and (b) is a flowchart illustrating a small hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a general-purpose game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a normal electric winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual process. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary figure ordinary process shift setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the process change setting process during normal figure change. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the process during normal-figure change, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the process-shift setting process during normal-figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a normal figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process change setting process during a normal drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a normal drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a normal power operation shift setting process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the ordinary electric remaining sphere processing, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the ordinary figure end processing transition setting processing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the ordinary drawing end processing, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart explaining magnet fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main award ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining an opening signal editing process. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the selection rate of a state suggestion display. It is a flowchart explaining a main process in the effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a one-shot system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a pre-reading symbol system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a prefetch variation command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a jackpot system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a count effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a round effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an interval effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an ending effect setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification of the effect in the special game state. It is a figure explaining the modification of the effect in the special game state. It is a flowchart explaining an initial operation process. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of information used for setting an initial operation. It is a figure showing the state where each movable production device operated. It is a figure explaining an initial operation at the time of restoration from a power failure. It is a figure showing an example of an initial operation table. It is a figure showing an example of an initial operation table. It is a figure explaining an alternative initial operation. It is a flowchart explaining an operation | movement substitution process. It is a figure explaining change of a notice effect. It is a figure explaining the display mode and the reliability of a notice effect. It is a flowchart explaining an effect mode management process. It is a flowchart explaining an effect mode switching setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a notice change process. It is a flowchart explaining the notice change process in the 1st modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a prefetch information storage area according to a second modification. It is a flowchart explaining the notice change process in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the notice effect in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining change of notice effect in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the notice change process in the 3rd modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an initial operation process in a fourth modification. It is a flowchart explaining the initial operation process in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the initial operation process in another example of a 5th modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a one-shot command processing according to a sixth modification; It is a flowchart explaining the reception command analysis processing in the 6th modification. It is a flow chart explaining return operation processing in the 6th modification. It is a figure explaining the operation range of the movable production device in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining an execution mode of a notice effect in the 8th modification. It is a figure explaining an execution mode of a notice effect in the 8th modification.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and notify when an abnormality has occurred (for example, when a dispensing abnormality has occurred, the lamp, LED, and the like are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19 a that emits sound (for example, sound effect). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b notify the details of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for payment abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

An upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying game balls to a hit ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are provided below the front frame 12. There are provided an upper plate ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a hitting ball firing device, and the like. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from a player is provided. A touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from a player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25. However, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub-display device is provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  On the right side of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, an ejection button operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball firing device moves the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect or the like in which the operation of the player is interposed is performed. It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is configured to be surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. Further, on the left side of the game area 32, a guide wall 491 is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and forms a guide path 490 for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

  In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is mounted in a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent game balls from jumping from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (CRT). In a region (display region) where an image on the display screen can be displayed, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), information relating to a game such as a character that produces a special figure variable display game and a background image that enhances the rendering effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating. The board presentation device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate (general symbol start gate) 34 for giving a start condition of the general symbol change display game. The game ball that has won the general-purpose starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31). Two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is provided on the lower right of the special variable winning device 38 arranged on the lower right of the center case 40. 35 are arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 31).

  Below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and a second special figure change display for giving a start condition of a first special figure change display game (special figure 1 change display game). A winning device 90 having a second start winning opening 97 (start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition of a game (a special figure 2 variable display game) is provided. The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 for alternately distributing the game balls flowing into the upper inlet 91 to the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 therein. The distribution member 92 is rotatable about a rotation axis extending in the front-rear direction. The tilting direction changes according to the weight of the flowing game balls, and the first start winning opening 36 on the left and the second on the right. The game balls are alternately distributed to the starting winning opening 97. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 31), and the game ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 is the start opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 31). Is detected by Further, below the prize device 90, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize port or the like is provided.

  On the right side of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for giving a start condition of the second special figure variable display game. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction of falling rightward and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is always The closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) is maintained, which is almost vertical and in which the game ball cannot flow. Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 31) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side is tilted to the right, and the normal fluctuation display game is performed. It can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for a player) in which a game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 31). It should be noted that it is also possible to make it possible to win even when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the closed state, and to make it harder to win in the closed state than in the open state.

  On the right side of the normal fluctuation prize device 37, there is formed a downflow path 615 that is covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicates up and down, and game balls that have not won the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 pass through the downflow path 615. Flow down to A guide 616 is provided below the downflow path 615. The guiding portion 616 has an upper surface 617 formed as an inclined surface that is lowered to the left. The guiding ball 616 receives a downwardly flowing game ball with the upper surface 617 and guides the game ball to the left where the special fluctuation winning device 38 exists. In addition, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information about the special figure change display game.

  The information display device 630 includes a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories that are the right to execute the first special figure variable display game, and a second start memory that is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game. And a second information display unit for displaying the number of. In addition, the special special figure variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game is displayed by the fourth symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41. The third special information display unit and the decoration special figure 2 change corresponding to the second special figure change display game by the fourth design separately from the decoration special figure change display game displayed by the first to third designs on the display device 41. A fourth information display unit for displaying a display game is provided.

  The first information display unit and the second information display unit each include two light emitting members, and the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit each include one light emitting member. In the second display device, these six light emitting members are arranged in two rows on the left and right in three by three. The upper two light emitting members in the right column constitute a first information display unit, and the upper two light emitting members in the left column constitute a second information display unit. The lower one light emitting member in the right column constitutes a third information display unit, and the lower one light emitting member in the left column constitutes a fourth information display unit.

  The first information display section and the second information display section are each composed of two light-emitting members, and a design is provided around each information display section so that the two light-emitting members are related. At a glance, it can be seen that one information display section is constituted by two light emitting members. Further, the third information display section and the fourth information display section are each constituted by one light emitting member, but the designs around these information display sections are designed to be understood to be independent. Thus, it can be seen at a glance that the information display section is constituted by one light emitting member. It should be noted that the design around the light emitting member has a sense of unity with the design of the entire gaming machine, so as not to impair the aesthetic appearance. Further, the design around the light emitting member is not formed by attaching a seal or the like, but is formed into a member constituting the guiding portion 616, so that labor and cost during manufacturing can be reduced.

  Further, on the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable prize winning device (large winning prize port) 38 which can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game is arranged. Has been established. Although the details of the configuration of the special fluctuation winning device 38 will be described later, depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening / closing member 990 changes from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) with the large winning opening closed. The opening / closing member 990 retreats and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be received. That is, the special variable winning device 38 has a special winning opening which is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 990 driven by a special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 31) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state (first special gaming state). During the small win game state (the second special game state), the large winning opening is changed from a closed state to an open state, thereby facilitating the flow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is provided with a predetermined winning state. A game value (prize ball) is provided. In addition, inside the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 31) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening. .

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the gaming area 32 in which the gaming ball flows down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is defined as a left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is defined as a right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and fires a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 of the winning device 90 are achieved. By launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim at a prize to the general-purpose starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38. It has become.

  Outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right portion of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, which constitute the special figure variable display game, and the prize to the general figure start gate 34 are displayed. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a game-changing display game as a trigger and displaying various information.

  The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure change display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 change display for a special figure 1 change display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A special figure 2 display (second special figure change display unit) 52 for a game and various displays constituted by LED lamps are provided. The various displays include a special figure 1 hold display for notifying the start storage number of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 2 hold display for notifying the start storage number of the special figure 2 variable display game. . A round display unit for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device is opened and closed); a first game state display unit for notifying whether the machine is in a time-saving state (during normal power support or in a specific game state); A second game state display unit for notifying the player of a beating (a normal beating) and a right beating that is advantageous for the player (the beating corresponding to the playing state) is included. In addition, a third game state display unit (third game state display unit, probability state display unit) for displaying that the big hit probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, A general-purpose display indicator for displaying a start-up storage number of the general-purpose change display game.

  The special figure 1 display 51 repeatedly performs a special figure 1 changing display in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order during the changing time of the first special figure changing display game. Then, when the fluctuating time of the first special figure fluctuating display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the first special figure fluctuating display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 1 changing display and the lighting pattern displayed as a result form constitute identification information (a special figure, a special design) for displaying the first special figure changing display game.

  The special figure 2 display 52 repeatedly performs a special figure 2 changing display of displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order during the changing time of the second special figure changing display game. Then, when the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the second special figure fluctuation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 2 changing display and the lighting pattern displayed as a result form constitute identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure changing display game.

  During the fluctuating time of the general-floor display game, the general-figure display repeatedly performs the general fluctuating display in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the fluctuation time of the general-floor variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the general-floor variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the normal-floating change display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result form the identification information (normal figure, normal design) for displaying the general-figure display game.

  The special figure 1 hold indicator displays the number of first start memories (first hold number), which is the execution right of the first special figure change display game, by turning off, blinking, and lighting a plurality of light emitting units. The special figure 2 hold display device displays the number of second start memories (second hold number), which is the execution right of the second special figure change display game, by turning off, blinking, and lighting a plurality of light emitting units. The general-figure hold display displays the number of general-figure start memories (the number of general-figure hold), which is the right to execute the general-figure change display game, by turning off, blinking, and lighting a plurality of light emitting units.

  The round display unit turns off all the light emitting units when not in the special game state, and sets a lighting mode corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. The first game state display unit (time saving state notification unit) turns off the lamp when the normal game state where the time saving state does not occur (when the fluctuation time reduction function is not activated), and the time saving state occurs. If it is (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), the lamp is turned on. The second game state display unit (right-hand notification unit) 57 turns off the lamp when the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game (at the time of normal beating), and turns off the lamp rather than the left-handed. In the case of a game state in which right-handed is more advantageous for the player (right-handed), the lamp is turned on. The third gaming state display unit turns on the LED when the power is turned on when the state is in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when the state is not the high probability state.

  Next, details of the gaming board 30 in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a game board body 80 having a substantially rectangular plate shape, a front component 600 forming a front portion of the center case 40, and a rear portion of the center case 40. And a rear component 700 to which various members necessary for the component 30 are attached.

  The front component member 600 is attached by being fitted from the front side into an opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80 that penetrates back and forth. The front component has an annular base member 610, and various members are attached to the base member 610. The base member 610 is inserted into the front and rear openings 81 formed in the game board main body 80, and forms a front wall of an inner peripheral wall in a concave chamber-shaped space recessed rearward from the game area 32 and a peripheral wall 611. And a plate-shaped flange-shaped mounting portion 612 formed perpendicular to the peripheral wall 611 at the front end of the peripheral wall 611.

  The portion of the mounting portion 612 formed outside the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 611 is formed when the front component 600 is inserted into the opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80 from the front side. It extends outside the peripheral edge, and the back surface of the game board main body 80 is in contact with the front surface. Thereby, the front-back position of the front component 600 with respect to the game board main body 80 is set to a predetermined front-back position. Further, a plurality of screw holes are formed in the mounting portion 612 so that the front component member 600 can be fixed to the game board main body 80 by screws. Further, a part of the mounting portion 612 is arranged at a position on the front side of the game board main body 80 and visible from a player, and the front surface is decorated. In addition, the base member 610 is formed with a screw hole, a screwing portion, a boss for positioning, a concave portion for receiving the boss, a slit for receiving a rib, and the like, so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Has become.

  On the front surface of the base member 610, a regulating wall 613 is provided except for a portion where a later-described stage portion 620, a warp channel forming member 614, and a normal fluctuation winning device 37 are arranged. The restriction wall 613 is located forward of the mounting portion 612 by the front and rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front of the game board main body 80 to the back of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board 30). It is designed to extend. Therefore, by attaching the front component member 600 to a predetermined position of the game board main body 80, the regulation wall 613 located on the front side of the attachment portion 612 extends into the game area 32, and the game ball flowing down the game area 32 is centered. The flow into the case 40 is regulated. Thus, the visibility of the display device 41 is ensured, and the number of game balls flowing into the stage section 620 is limited.

  A warp flow that forms a warp flow path that receives a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and guides the game ball to the stage 620 is provided on the left side of the base member 610 when viewed from the front side. A road forming member 614 is attached. The warp channel forming member 614 is attached to the front surface of the attachment portion 612, and the front and rear width of the game area 32 (the cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 from the front of the game board body 80) than the attachment portion 612. (The width to the back of the camera)). Further, the upper end of the warp flow path forming member 614 is connected to the lower end of the regulating wall 613 attached so as to extend forward from the attaching portion 612 on the left side when viewed from the front side of the base member 610. It has become.

  The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a cylindrical flow path having an inner diameter that allows game balls to flow down in a row, and opens toward the left game area 32 of the center case 40, A game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. This upstream end forms the inlet of the warp channel. Further, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path that guides the game ball flowing from the upstream end to the lower right and then guides the game ball backward. The downstream end is opened rearward to guide the game ball to the left end of the stage 620.

  In the stage section 620, the game ball can roll back and forth and left and right, and both left and right sides have an inclined surface descending toward the center, and a central portion directly above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90 projects upward. It is formed in a substantially W shape. The center of the stage 620 protrudes upward, but is lower than both left and right ends. A game ball that has passed through the warp channel from the left end flows into the stage section 620, and rolls along the left-right direction. Also, game balls that have bounced below the stage section 620 can flow in.

  In the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, an inclined surface 621 descending forward is formed at the lowest portion located on both sides of the central portion projecting upward. Due to the inclined surface 621, the game ball whose flowing force is weakened on the stage 620 is guided from the front end of the stage 620 to the lower game area 32.

  Also, in the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, a groove-shaped flow passage 622 extending in the front-rear direction and descending rearward is provided at a vertex of a central portion protruding upward. Is formed. The downflow path 622 has a shallow groove, and many game balls roll right and left without fitting in the groove. The game ball fitted to the downflow path 622 is guided backward, flows into an inflow port (not shown), and flows into a guiding flow path 623 formed below the stage section 620. The guide flow path 623 is a flow path that descends forward, and the downstream end is located immediately above the inflow port 91 of the prize winning device 90, and flows into the prize winning device 90 with high probability.

  On the right side when viewed from the front side of the front component 600, there is provided a general-purpose starting gate 34 through which game balls can pass vertically. The ordinary figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a for detecting a passing game ball. In addition, a normal fluctuation winning device 37 having a movable member 37b is provided below the ordinary figure starting gate 34. The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is guided to the rear of the front component member 600 and flows into a discharge flow path (not shown). The normal fluctuation winning device 37 includes a start port 2 switch for detecting a winning game ball and a general-purpose solenoid 37c for driving a movable member 37b.

  On the right side of the normal fluctuation prize device 37, there is formed a downflow path 615 that is covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicates up and down, and game balls that have not won the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 pass through the downflow path 615. Flow down to A guide 616 is provided below the downflow path 615. The upper surface 617 of the guiding portion is an inclined surface descending leftward, and receives the game ball flowing down the downflow path 615 by the upper surface 617 and guides the ball to the left. In addition, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information about the special figure change display game.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the rear component 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a concave portion 711 opened forward, and the rear base member 710 has a screw hole or a screw. A stopper, a boss for positioning, a recess for receiving the boss, a slit for receiving the rib, and the like are formed so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Further, a flange-shaped fixing portion 713 is formed at the front end of the rear base member 710 and extends perpendicularly outward with respect to the side wall 712. It can be fixed in position. The rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 is formed with a through hole 715 that penetrates back and forth. The through hole 715 allows the display surface of the display device 41 attached to the rear of the rear base member 710 to be visible.

  The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface capable of covering the entire through hole 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. I have. The display device 41 is attached so that the display surface is on the front side, so that the image on the display surface can be visually recognized from the front of the game board 30 via the through hole 715 formed in the rear base member 710. Have been. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to a device including a liquid crystal display device, and may include, for example, a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  The lower movable role unit 730, the upper movable role unit 800, and the central movable role form a board rendering device 44 that is a movable rendering device that performs a game rendering by operating inside the concave portion 711 of the rear base member 710. A unit 880 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the lower movable accessory unit 730 is disposed below the through hole 715. As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the lower movable role unit 730 includes two first lower movable members 740 and 741 simulating a banner, and a second lower movable member 770 simulating a gourd. The first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are operable to appear on the front side of the display device 41. Further, the lower movable auditors unit 730 includes a first lower movable member 740, 741 and a second lower movable member 770, a driving mechanism for operating the lower movable member 770, and a first lower portion disposed on the front side as a base portion for mounting various members. A base portion 731, a second lower base portion 732 disposed in the center, and a third lower base portion 733 disposed on the back surface side are provided.

  A motor 734 serving as a drive source for driving the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 is provided at a lower right portion viewed from the front side of the third lower base portion 733, and has a drive shaft extending in the front-rear direction. Attached along. The lower movable accessory unit 730 is provided with first lower movable members 740 and 741 and a second lower movable member 770, which are driven by one motor 734. The driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to a first gear 735 rotatable about an axis along the front-rear direction and a second gear 737 meshing with the first gear 735 and rotatable about an axis along the front-rear direction. It is transmitted at the same time. The first gear 735 is for operating the first lower movable members 740 and 741, and a first drive shaft 736 for transmitting power to the first lower movable members 740 and 741 extends forward on the front side. It is provided to be.

  A first light-shielding plate 739 is provided on the outer periphery of the first gear 735 so as to extend in the radial direction. The first light shielding plate 739 can be detected by a first detection sensor 781 (shown in FIG. 7) provided adjacent to the first gear 735. The first detection sensor 781 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and generates an ON signal by detecting light from the light-emitting unit in the light-receiving unit. It is arranged so that the gap between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit in the detecting unit is located on the circumference where the first light shielding plate 739 provided on the first gear 735 moves.

  The second gear 737 is for operating the second lower movable member 770, and a second drive shaft 738 for transmitting power to the second lower movable member 770 extends rearward on the back side. It is provided in. As will be described later, when the motor 734 is driven in a predetermined direction (here, clockwise as viewed from the front side), the first lower movable members 740 and 741 operate by transmitting a driving force via a first driving shaft 736. When the second lower movable member 770 drives the motor 734 in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise as viewed from the front side), the driving force is transmitted via the second driving shaft 738. It is configured to operate.

  As shown in FIG. 6, one of the first lower movable members 740 includes a bearing 742 at a lower end thereof, and the bearing 742 is provided on an upper portion of the second lower base 732. Is rotatably supported. The bearing 742 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 740 can operate around the rotation shaft 751 by receiving a driving force from the motor 734. Similarly, the other first lower movable member 741 is provided with a bearing portion 743 at a lower end portion, and this bearing portion 743 is rotated by a rotating shaft 752 provided on an upper portion of the second lower base portion 732 and extending in the front-rear direction. It is supported as much as possible. The bearing portion 743 is a gear, and the first lower movable member 741 can operate around the rotation shaft 752 by receiving a driving force from the motor 734.

  The gear of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 supported by the left rotation shaft 751 as viewed from the front is doubled in the front and rear, and the driving force from the motor 734 is provided by the front gear. Is to receive. The rear gear transmits driving force to the gear of the bearing portion 743 provided on the other first lower movable member 741, and one motor 734 controls the two first lower movable members 740, 741 can operate simultaneously.

  The gear on the front side of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 supported by the rotation shaft 751 on the left side when viewed from the front is arranged below the bearing portion 742 and centered on an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Gear 753 that can rotate. The gear 753 meshes with a rack gear 761 provided on an upper portion of a slide member 760 provided on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 so as to be slidable left and right with respect to the second lower base portion 732. The first lower movable members 740 and 741 operate by moving the slide member 760 left and right.

  The slide member 760 is a plate-shaped member, and is arranged such that the plate surface is along the front surface of the second lower base portion 732. The slide member 760 is formed with an oval supported portion 762 that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right. The support portion 762 has a support shaft formed on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 and protruding forward. By inserting the 754, it is slidably supported in the left-right direction. Furthermore, since the first lower base portion 731 attached to the front of the second lower base portion 732 covers the slide member 760, the slide member 760 is held so as not to fall forward.

  The slide member 760 is formed with a linear through hole 763 penetrating back and forth. The through hole 763 includes an arc-shaped portion and a straight portion extending downward from a right end of the arc-shaped portion when viewed from the front side. A first drive shaft 736 provided on the first gear 735 is inserted through the through hole 763 from behind, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the slide member 760.

  FIG. 6A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all at the initial position. In this state, the first drive shaft 736 is located at the connection between the arc-shaped portion and the straight portion in the through hole. The radius of the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 763 is equal to the length from the center of the first gear 735 to the center of the first drive shaft 736. In the initial state, the center of the first gear 735 and the center of a circle forming an arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 763 are in front and rear coincidence. When the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are in the initial position, the first light blocking plate 739 is retracted from the gap between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit, and the detection result of the first detection sensor 781 turns ON. (See FIGS. 5 and 7A).

  When the first gear 735 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side from the initial state, the first drive shaft 736 moves along the linear portion of the through hole 763 while pushing the slide member 760 to the left. Thus, as shown in FIG. 6B, the slide member 760 slides to the left, and the rack gear 761 rotates the gear 753, so that the first lower movable members 740 and 741 rotate upward. Thus, the display device 41 appears on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation opposite to the above is performed. As described later, the second lower movable member 770 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the first drive shaft 736 moves along the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 763, the first drive shaft 736 does not press the slide member 760, and the first lower movable members 740 and 741 do not operate. The same applies when returning the second lower movable member 770 from the operated state to the initial state.

  Also, by rotating the first gear 735 clockwise as viewed from the front side from the initial state to move the first lower movable members 740 and 741 from the initial position, the first light shielding plate 739 can emit light and receive light. And the detection result of the first detection sensor 781 becomes OFF. The first light shielding plate 739 is provided in a range where the state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 have entered the detection unit of the first detection sensor 781 when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not at the initial position is maintained. Based on the sensor 781 being in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not at the initial position. That is, the first detection sensor 781 constitutes a position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the first lower movable members 740, 741, which are movable effect devices forming the board effect device 44, and the first lower movable members 740, 741 are in the initial position. The effect switch switch 47 for detecting the presence of the character is made.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the second lower movable member 770 includes a rotation shaft 771 at the lower end thereof extending in the front-rear direction, and the rotation shaft is configured by the second lower base portion 732 and the third lower base portion 733. To be rotatable. In the vicinity of the rotating shaft 771, a linear through hole 772 penetrating back and forth is formed. The through hole 772 has an arc-shaped portion and a straight portion extending from the left end of the arc-shaped portion as viewed from the front side in the state shown in FIG. A second drive shaft 738 provided on the second gear 737 is inserted through the through hole 772 from the front, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the second lower movable member 770.

  Further, a second light shielding plate 773 extending in the radial direction of the rotation shaft is provided near the rotation shaft 771 and at a position facing the through hole 772 with the rotation shaft 771 interposed therebetween. The second light shielding plate 773 can be detected by a second detection sensor 782 (shown in FIG. 7) provided adjacent to the second lower movable member 770. The second detection sensor 782 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and generates an ON signal by detecting light from the light-emitting unit in the light-receiving unit. The second light-blocking plate 773 provided on the second lower movable member 770 is disposed at a position on the circumference where the gap between the light-emitting unit and the light-receiving unit in the detection unit moves.

  FIG. 7A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all at the initial position. In this state, the second drive shaft 738 is located at a connection portion between the arc-shaped portion and the straight portion in the through hole 772. The radius of the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 772 is equal to the length from the center of the second gear 737 to the center of the second drive shaft 738. Then, in the initial state, the center of the second gear 737 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 772 are in front and rear coincidence.

  In this state, the first light shielding plate 739 is retracted from the detection unit of the first detection sensor 781, and the first detection sensor 781 is turned on. Further, the second light shielding plate 773 is retracted from the detection section of the second detection sensor 782, and the second detection sensor 782 is turned on. As described above, based on the fact that both the first detection sensor 781 and the second detection sensor 782 are ON, the effect control device 300 determines that both the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are in the initial position. It is possible to grasp that it is in the initial state.

  From this initial state, when the motor 734 is driven so that the second gear 737 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front side, the second drive shaft 738 pushes the second lower movable member 770 upward to form the through hole 772. Move a straight line. This causes the second lower movable member 770 to rotate upward and appear on the front side of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 7B. When returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial state, the operation opposite to the above is performed.

  In addition, when the second lower movable member 770 operates from the initial position, the second light blocking plate 773 enters the detection unit of the second detection sensor 782, and the second detection sensor 782 is turned off. The second light shielding plate 773 is provided in a range where the state in which the second lower movable member 770 has entered the detection unit of the second detection sensor 782 is not maintained in the initial position, and the second detection sensor 782 is provided. Is in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the second lower movable member 770 is not at the initial position. That is, the operation state of the second lower movable member 770 can be detected based on the detection result of the second detection sensor 782, and the position of the second lower movable member 770 forming the movable effect device can be detected by the second detection sensor 782. In addition to forming the position detecting means, the presenter switch 47 is provided for detecting that the second lower movable member 770 is at the initial position.

  When the second lower movable member 770 is operated from the initial position, the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side from the state shown in FIG. Becomes The first light shielding plate 739 is provided in such a range that the state in which it does not enter the detection section of the first detection sensor 781 is maintained in this process, and the first detection sensor 781 remains in the ON state. Of course, in the process of returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position, the opposite operation is performed, so that the first detection sensor 781 remains ON.

  Further, as described above, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the second gear 737 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the second drive shaft 738 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 772, it does not press the second lower movable member 770, and the second lower movable member 770 does not operate. The same applies when returning the first lower movable members 740 and 741 from the operated state to the initial state.

  As described above, when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are operated from the initial position, the first gear 735 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front side from the state illustrated in FIG. As a result, the first light shielding plate 739 enters the detection section of the first detection sensor 781, and the first detection sensor 781 is turned off. The first light shielding plate 739 is provided in a range where the state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 have entered the detection unit of the first detection sensor 781 when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not at the initial position is maintained. Based on the sensor 781 being in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not at the initial position.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8, when the second lower movable member 770 rotates upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41, an effect display is performed on the display device 41 to emphasize the second lower movable member 770. It has become possible. Of course, even when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 appear on the front side of the display device 41, the effect display may be similarly performed. The display mode of the effect display is not limited to this, but may be any display that emphasizes the movable member that appears on the front side of the display device 41.

  A plurality of LEDs are provided in a portion of the second lower movable member 770 that resembles a gourd so that decoration by light emission can be performed. In addition, the character "Dealka" also emits light. The four characters emit light independently of each other, but for "ru", the "no" portion and the "re" portion emit light more independently. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 7B and 8, only the “de” portion and the “le” portion of the “le” emit light and can be displayed as “delete”. I have. In this way, by dividing characters and displaying different information, a novel effect can be achieved. In addition, the display of “delete” is for notifying that it is the dele mode which is one of the plurality of effect modes. As described above, the effect mode is notified by the display on the movable member, so that the set effect mode can be easily communicated to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the upper movable accessory unit 800 is arranged above the through hole 715 and on both sides. As shown in FIG. 9, the upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a circular first upper movable member 848 and a second upper movable member 860 imitating a tiger's hand. The effect is performed by operating the upper movable member 860.

  The upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a base member 801 attached to the rear base member 710, and a movable member unit 820 operable up and down with respect to the base member 801 and including a first upper movable member 848. . The base member 801 has a U-shape as viewed from the front side, and has an upper base portion 802 disposed above the through hole 715 and a left base portion disposed to the left as viewed from the front side of the through hole 715. 803 and a right base portion 804 disposed to the right as viewed from the front side of the through hole 715.

  At the right end of the left base portion 803 and the left end of the right base portion 804, a guide portion 805 extending along the vertical direction is provided. The guide 805 guides the movable member unit 820 in the vertical direction. Further, the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 are provided with a driving mechanism 806 for driving the movable member unit 820 up and down, respectively. Note that, of the drive mechanisms 806 that drive the movable member unit 820 up and down, the drive mechanism 806 that performs the operation on the left side when viewed from the front side is referred to as a movable member unit (left), and the drive mechanism 806 that performs the operation on the right side is movable. It may be referred to as a member unit (right).

  Each drive mechanism 806 has a motor 807 as a drive source, and the arm is rotated by driving the motor 807. A drive shaft 809 is provided at the tip of the arm. The drive shaft 809 is connected to the link member 830 of the movable member unit 820. When the motor 807 is driven, the link member 830 is operated to drive the movable member unit 820 up and down.

  The movable member unit 820 includes a link member 830 connected to the drive mechanism 806, a unit base portion 841 for attaching various members, a first upper movable member 848 disposed in front of the unit base portion 841, and a unit base. A first drive unit (not shown) for driving the first upper movable member disposed on the back side of the unit 841, a second drive unit (not shown) for driving the second upper movable member, and a back surface of the unit base unit 841 And a guided member 842 guided by a guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804.

  The link members 830 are rotatably attached to the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804, respectively, and are arranged so as to extend in directions facing each other. The link member 830 is provided with a rotation shaft 810 provided on the left base portion 803 and extending forward along the front-rear direction or a rotation shaft provided on the right base portion 804 and extending forward along the front-rear direction. One end has a bearing portion 831 through which the 810 is inserted, and is rotatably supported by the left base portion 803 or the right base portion 804. The link member 830 is formed with a first guide portion 832 which is a long hole through which a drive shaft 809 provided on the arm of the drive mechanism 806 is inserted. The first guide portion 832 drives the motor 807 to rotate the arm. Thus, the drive shaft 809 moves the link member 830 up and down while moving along the first guide portion 832.

  In the vicinity of the bearing 831 of the link member 830 supported by the left base 803, a third light-shielding plate 835 extending in the radial direction of the rotating shaft 810 is provided. The third light blocking plate 835 can be detected by a third detection sensor 811 provided adjacent to the rotation shaft 810 of the left base portion 803. The third detection sensor 811 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and outputs an ON signal by detecting light from the light-emitting unit in the light-receiving unit. The third light-shielding plate 835 is arranged such that the gap between the light-emitting unit and the light-receiving unit in the detection unit is located on the circumference where the third light-shielding plate 835 moves.

  In the vicinity of the bearing 831 of the link member 830 supported by the right base 804, a fourth light shielding plate 836 extending in the radial direction of the rotating shaft 810 is provided. The fourth light shielding plate 836 can be detected by a fourth detection sensor 812 provided adjacent to the rotation shaft 810 of the right base 804. The fourth detection sensor 812 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and outputs an ON signal by detecting light from the light-emitting unit in the light-receiving unit. The fourth light-shielding plate 836 is arranged so that the gap between the light-emitting unit and the light-receiving unit in the detection unit is located on the circumference where the fourth light shielding plate 836 moves.

  Further, a connection shaft for connecting to the unit base portion 841 of the movable member unit 820 is provided at the other end of the link member 830 opposite to the one end provided with the bearing 831 so as to extend rearward. I have. Also, the link member 830 has a second guide portion 834 which is an elongated hole which can be inserted through a support shaft provided at one end of the back surface of the second upper movable member 860 attached so as to cover the front side of the link member 830. Are formed, and one end of the second upper movable member 860 is guided and supported by the second guide portion 834.

  The unit base portion 841 includes a circular main body, and a supported portion 845 extending left and right from the main body. The supported portion 845 is formed with a third guide portion which is a long hole penetrating front and rear and extending left and right. The connection shaft of the link member 830 is slidably connected to the third guide portion 846. The unit base portion 841 moves up and down in response to the operation of the link member 830 based on the driving of the motor 807. A guided member 842 is attached to the back surface of the unit base portion 841. The guided member 842 is a plate-shaped member arranged to extend in the left-right direction. The guided member guided at the left and right ends by a guiding portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804. 843 are provided.

  A circular first upper movable member 848 is provided on the front side of the main body. The first upper movable member 848 has a main body portion rotatably supported by a rotation shaft along the front-rear direction provided at the center of the back surface, and the first drive portion rotates the rotation shaft, and It is designed to rotate around a rotation axis. The first drive unit is provided with a fifth detection sensor that detects that the rotatable first upper movable member 848 is at the initial position.

  Further, the second driving section provided in the main body can drive the second upper movable member 860 independently of the first upper movable member 848. The second drive unit includes a drive arm 853 that drives the second upper movable member 860, and is capable of swinging the drive arm 853 right and left. A second upper movable member 860 is connected to the other end of the drive arm 853, and the second upper movable member 860 swings left and right by swinging the drive arm 853 left and right. Further, the second drive unit is provided with an eighth detection sensor that detects that the swingable second upper movable member 860 is at the initial position.

  9 to 11 show the operation of the upper movable accessory unit 800. Some members are omitted for the sake of explanation. FIG. 9 shows an initial state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the initial position at the upper end of the operation range, and the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are also at the initial position. FIG. 10 shows an operation state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operation range, but the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are at the initial positions. FIG. 11 shows an operation state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operation range, and the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are also operating from the initial position.

  In the initial state shown in FIG. 9, the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end position in the operation range. In this state, the third light-shielding plate 835 is located at the detection unit of the third detection sensor 811, and the fourth light-shielding plate 836 is located at the detection unit of the fourth detection sensor 812, and the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection All the sensors 812 are turned off. Further, the fifth detection sensor and the eighth detection sensor are also turned off. When the drive mechanism 806 is operated from this initial state to rotate the drive shaft 809 provided at the tip of the arm toward the display device 41, the link member 830 is rotated downward, and the movable member unit 820 is moved. Move down. In the operation state where the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operation range, the drive shaft 809 is located at the lower end of the rotation range as shown in FIG. 10, and the link member 830 is also located at the lower end of the rotation range. ing.

  In this state, the third light shielding plate 835 is retracted from the detection unit of the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth light shielding plate 836 is retracted from the detection unit of the fourth detection sensor 812. All four detection sensors 812 are turned on. Since the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are at the initial positions, the fifth detection sensor and the eighth detection sensor are both turned off.

  That is, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the movable member unit 820 is at the initial position based on the fact that both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 are OFF. Therefore, the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 form the effect switch 47 that detects the initial position of the movable member unit 820 that forms the board effect device 44. In addition, the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 constitute a position detection unit that can detect the position of the movable member unit 820 that forms the movable effect device.

  Here, the state in which both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 are OFF continues to the extent that the movable member unit 820 has slightly moved from the initial position, but the third light shielding plate 835 and the fourth light shielding By adjusting the range in which the plate 836 is provided, both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 can be turned on in a state where the movable member unit 820 has slightly operated from the initial position. .

  When the first driving section is operated, the first upper movable member 848 rotates in one direction, and the fifth detection sensor is turned on until returning to the initial position shown in FIG. Note that the first upper movable member 848 can be driven clockwise or counterclockwise. Further, when the second driving section is operated, the second upper movable member 860 is shifted toward the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. 10 and is moved from the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. The operation of moving left and right between the separated state is repeated. The eighth detection sensor remains ON until returning to the initial position shown in FIG. That is, the fifth detection sensor constitutes a position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the first upper movable member 848 which forms the movable effect device, and an effect actor switch for detecting that the first upper movable member 848 is at the initial position. Make 47. In addition, the eighth detection sensor constitutes a position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the second upper movable member 860 forming the movable effect device, and an effect character switch for detecting that the second upper movable member 860 is at the initial position. Make 47.

  That is, the first upper movable member 848 forms a first effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the driving mechanism 806 and the link member 830 act as the first drive mechanism for operating the first effect movable body. And these constitute the first effect device. Further, the second upper movable member 860 forms a second effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the driving unit 850 forms a second drive mechanism for operating the second effect movable body. Constitutes the second effect device.

  In addition, the second upper movable member 860 is arranged so as to cover and hide the link member 830 at both the initial position shown in FIG. 9 and the position after the operation shown in FIG. 11, and operates with the link member 830 covered. It has become. By covering the link member 830 with the second upper movable member 860 that operates, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the second upper movable member 860, and it is possible to effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the link member 830. A higher concealing effect can be obtained than in the case of covering with a decorative member that does not. Also, particularly at the initial position, as shown in FIG. 2, the link member 830 is covered so as to be invisible to the player. As a result, unnecessary portions are not seen by the player in the initial position, which occupies most of the game, and the decorativeness is improved.

  From the above, the game is executed based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, and the effect related to the game is controlled in the gaming machine 10 that generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result. Effect control means (effect control device 300), a first effect device (first upper movable member 848, drive mechanism 806, link member 830) controlled by the effect control means and performing an effect related to a game by operating, and a second effect device Effect device (second upper movable member 860, drive unit 850), the first effect device is capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, a first effect movable body (first upper movable member 848), A first drive mechanism (drive mechanism 806, link member 830) for operating the first effect movable body, wherein the second effect device is capable of performing a predetermined effect operation. (On the second Moving member 860), and a second drive mechanism (drive 850) for operating the second effect movable body, and the second effect movable body is arranged to cover the first drive mechanism. It will be.

  Therefore, since the second effect movable body is arranged so as to cover the first drive mechanism, unnecessary portions are difficult to be seen by the player, and the effect of the effect of the operating effect device can be enhanced. Can be improved. In particular, by covering the first drive mechanism with the second production movable body that operates, the consciousness of the player can be attracted to the second production movable body, and it is possible to effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the first drive mechanism. As a result, a higher concealing effect can be obtained as compared with the case where the decoration member is simply covered with the inoperative member.

  Further, the second drive unit (the second upper movable member 860) is provided with the first drive mechanism (the link member 830) in a state where at least the first effector movable body (the first upper movable member 848) is at the initial position. It is covered so that it cannot be seen by a person. Therefore, in a state where the game is in the initial position which occupies most of the game, unnecessary portions are hardly seen by the player, and the effect of the operating effect device can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 3, central movable accessory unit 880 is arranged so as to surround the periphery of through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the central movable accessory unit 880 operates so that a plurality of four central movable effect members 900, 910, 920, and 930 are combined in front of the display device 41. It is to produce by doing.

  The central movable auditorium unit 880 includes a movable effect base member 881 attached to the rear base member 710. In addition, a first central movable effect member 900 and a second central movable effect member 910 which are arranged and operated on the upper front side of the movable effect base member 881, and a third which is arranged and operated on the lower front surface of the movable effect base member 881. A central movable effect member 920 and a fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided.

  The movable effect base member 881 is configured such that a first center movable effect member 900 and a second center movable effect member 910 are attached to the center in the left-right direction of a portion located above the display device 41. In this portion, a first rotating shaft 882 extending forward in the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the first center movable effecting member, and guiding the operation of the first center movable effecting member. A first guide portion 883, which is a long hole that penetrates forward and backward, is provided. In addition, a second rotation shaft 884 extending forward along a front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the second center movable effect member, and a front-rear direction for guiding the operation of the second center movable effect member. Is provided with a second guide portion 885 which is a long hole penetrating through.

  A drive source for operating the first center movable effect member 900 and the second center movable effect member 910 is provided on the right side when viewed from the front side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located above the display device 41. A motor 886 is provided. A plurality of gears and the like for transmitting the driving force of the motor 886 to the first central movable effect member 900 are provided on a portion on the back side of the movable effect base member 881 and between the first rotation shaft 882 and the motor 886. A drive mechanism is provided, and a back cover 896 is attached so as to cover the back of the drive mechanism.

  Further, a sixth detection sensor 889 is provided on the left side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located above the display device 41 when viewed from the front side. The sixth detection sensor 889 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit are arranged opposite to each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. Is output. A sixth light shielding plate 916 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the second central movable effecting member 910 attached to the front side of this portion, and the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the detecting portion of the sixth detection sensor 889 are provided. The gap is arranged at a position on the circumference where the sixth light shielding plate 916 moves.

  The movable effect base member 881 is configured such that a third center movable effect member 920 and a fourth center movable effect member 930 are attached to the left-right center of a portion located below the display device 41. In this portion, a third rotating shaft 891 extending forward in the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the third center movable effecting member and guiding the operation of the third center movable effecting member are guided. A third guide portion 892, which is a long hole that penetrates forward and backward, is provided. Also, a fourth rotation shaft 893 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the fourth center movable effect member, and a front-rear direction for guiding the operation of the fourth center movable effect member. Is provided with a fourth guide portion 894 which is a long hole penetrating through. A motor serving as a drive source for operating the third center movable effect member 920 and the fourth center movable effect member 930 is located on the left side when viewed from the front side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located below the display device 41. 895 are provided.

  Further, a seventh detection sensor 897 is provided at the center of a portion of the movable effect base member 881 located below the display device 41. The seventh detection sensor 897 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit are arranged opposite to each other with a predetermined distance therebetween, and detects an ON signal by detecting light from the light-emitting unit in the light-receiving unit. Is output. A seventh light shielding plate 926 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the third central movable effecting member 920 attached to the front side of this portion, and the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the detecting portion of the seventh detection sensor 897 are provided. The gap is arranged at a position on the circumference where the seventh light shielding plate 926 moves.

  The first center movable effect member 900 arranged at the upper right includes a decoration portion 901 which is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. In addition, a first bearing 902 that penetrates before and after the first rotation shaft 882 is inserted is provided at one end of the first center movable effecting member 900, and the first center movable effecting member 900 is in the first position. It is supported so as to be rotatable about a driving shaft 882.

  In the vicinity of the first bearing portion 902, a first sector gear 903 and a second sector gear 904 having a sector shape around the center of rotation of the first center movable effect member 900 are provided. The first sector gear 903 is provided so as to face right when viewed from the front side. The first sector gear 903 faces the back side of the movable effect base member 881 through a through portion 887 formed on the right side of the first rotation shaft 882 of the movable effect base member 881 and penetrating forward and backward. I have. Then, the rear surface side of the movable effect base member 881 is meshed with a gear transmitting the driving force from the motor 886.

  The second sector gear 904 is provided so as to face left when viewed from the front side. The second sector gear 904 meshes with a third sector gear 913 provided on a second central movable effect member 910 disposed adjacent to the left of the first central movable effect member 900. Thus, the driving force from the motor 886 received by the first sector gear 903 is transmitted to the second central movable effecting member 910 via the second sector gear 904. A guided shaft 905 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the first center movable effect member 900. The guided shaft 905 is inserted into the first guide portion 883, and is guided along the extending direction of the first guide portion 883 when the first center movable effecting member 900 rotates. This enables the first center movable effect member 900 to operate smoothly.

  The second central movable effecting member 910 provided at the upper left has a decoration portion 911 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, a second bearing 912 is provided at one end of the second movable center effect member 910 before and after the second rotation shaft 884 is inserted. It is supported so as to be rotatable around a driving shaft 884.

  In the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, a third sector gear 913 having a sector shape centered on the rotation center of the second central movable effect member 910 is provided. The third sector gear 913 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The third sector gear 913 meshes with a second sector gear 904 provided on the first center movable effect member 900 disposed adjacent to the right of the second center movable effect member 910. In addition, a guided shaft 914 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the second center movable effecting member 910. The guided shaft 914 is inserted into the second guide portion 885, and is guided along the extending direction of the second guide portion 885 when the second center movable effecting member 910 rotates. This enables the second center movable effect member 910 to operate smoothly.

  In the vicinity of the second bearing 912, an engagement portion 915 extending rearward is provided. The engaging portion 915 faces the back side of the movable effect base member 881 through a through portion 888 formed on the left side of the second rotation shaft 884 of the movable effect base member 881 and penetrating forward and backward. I have. Then, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), one end of the torsion coil spring 889 is engaged on the back side of the movable effect base member 881. The other end of the torsion coil spring 889 is locked by a locking portion 890 formed on the movable effect base member 881, and the engaging portion 915 of the second center movable effect member 910 is urged upward. It has become. Thereby, the urging force of the torsion coil spring 889 assists in holding the first center movable effect member 900 and the second center movable effect member 910 at the initial position, which is the upper end position in the operation range, and moves downward. The assisted first movable center effect member 900 and the second movable center effect member 910 that have operated return to the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the third central movable effecting member 920 arranged at the lower left has a decorative portion 921 which is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, a third bearing 922 is provided at one end of the third central movable effect member 920 before and after the third rotating shaft 891 is inserted. It is supported so as to be rotatable around a driving shaft 891.

  In the vicinity of the third bearing portion 922, a fourth sector gear 923 and a fifth sector gear 924 having a sector shape around the center of rotation of the third central movable effect member 920 are provided. The fourth sector gear 923 is provided so as to face the lower left side when viewed from the front side. The fourth sector gear 923 meshes with a gear of a motor 895 disposed at the lower left of the third rotation shaft 891 in the movable effect base member 881.

  Further, the fifth sector gear 924 is provided so as to face rightward when viewed from the front side. The fifth sector gear 924 meshes with a sixth sector gear 933 provided on a fourth center movable effect member 930 disposed adjacent to the right side of the third center movable effect member 920. Thus, the driving force from the motor 895 received by the fourth sector gear 923 is transmitted to the fourth central movable effecting member 930 via the fifth sector gear 924. In addition, a guided shaft 925 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the third center movable effecting member 920. The guided shaft 925 is inserted into the third guide portion 892, and is guided along the extending direction of the third guide portion 892 when the third center movable effecting member 920 rotates. This enables the third center movable effect member 920 to operate smoothly.

  The fourth central movable effecting member 930 arranged at the lower right includes a decorative portion 931 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. A fourth bearing 932 is provided at one end of the fourth movable center effect member 930 before and after the fourth rotating shaft 893 is inserted therethrough. It is supported so as to be rotatable around a driving shaft 893.

  In the vicinity of the fourth bearing 932, a sixth sector gear 933 and a seventh sector gear 934 having a sector shape centered on the rotation center of the fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided. The sixth sector gear 933 is provided so as to face left when viewed from the front side. The sixth sector gear 933 is adapted to mesh with a fifth sector gear 924 provided on a third center movable effect member 920 disposed adjacent to the left side of the fourth center movable effect member 930. A guided shaft 935 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the fourth central movable effecting member 930. The guided shaft 935 is configured to be inserted into the fourth guide portion 894, and is guided along the extending direction of the fourth guide portion 894 when the fourth center movable effecting member 930 rotates. This enables the fourth center movable effect member 930 to operate smoothly.

  The seventh sector gear 934 is provided so as to face the lower right side when viewed from the front side. The seventh sector gear 934 meshes with an eighth sector gear 942 provided on an urging mechanism 940 disposed on the lower right of the fourth center movable effect member 930. The urging mechanism 940 is rotatable about a rotation shaft 941 along the front-rear direction, and includes an eighth sector gear 942. The urging mechanism 940 is provided so as to extend leftward from the rotation shaft when viewed from the front side, and is urged downward (counterclockwise) by an urging member (not shown). As a result, the third center movable effecting member 920 and the fourth center movable effecting member 930 are urged in the direction toward the initial position, which is the lower end position in the operation range. Therefore, the urging force of the urging mechanism assists in holding the third movable center effect member 920 and the fourth movable center effect member 930 at the initial position, and the third central movable effect member 920 that has moved upward and This assists the fourth center movable effect member 930 when returning to the initial position.

  The central movable accessory unit 880 configured as described above can be converted into an initial state shown in FIG. 13 and an operation completed state shown in FIG. In the initial state shown in FIG. 13, the first center movable effecting member 900 and the second center movable effecting member 910 are at the initial position at the upper end of the operation range, and the third center movable effecting member 920 and the fourth center movable effecting member 930 are provided. Is located at the initial position at the lower end of the operation range, and is substantially retracted from the front surface of the display device 41.

  In this initial state, the sixth light shielding plate 916 is located in the gap between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the sixth detection sensor 889, and the detection result of the sixth detection sensor 889 is turned off. Further, the seventh light shielding plate 926 is located in the gap between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the seventh detection sensor 897, and the detection result by the seventh detection sensor 897 is turned off. That is, in the initial state, both the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are turned off. Based on this, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the first center movable effect member 900, the second center movable effect member 910, the third center movable effect member 920, and the fourth center movable effect member 930 are at the initial position. .

  In addition, since the first center movable effect member 900 and the second center movable effect member 910 are interlocked, the second center movable effect member 910 must be at the initial position based on the detection result of the sixth detection sensor 889. Is detected, it is also possible to detect that the first center movable effecting member 900 is at the initial position. Further, since the third center movable effecting member 920 and the fourth center movable effecting member 930 are interlocked, the third center movable effecting member 920 is in the initial position according to the detection result of the seventh detection sensor 897. Is detected, it is also possible to detect that the fourth center movable effect member 930 is at the initial position. Therefore, based on the fact that the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are both OFF, the effect control device 300 determines that the first center movable effect member 900, the second center movable effect member 910, and the third center movable effect member It is possible to grasp that 920 and the fourth center movable effect member 930 are at the initial position.

  When the motor 886 is operated from this initial state, the first center movable effecting member 900 and the second center movable effecting member 910 are rotated so as to descend, and when the motor 895 is operated, the third center movable effecting member 920 and The fourth center movable effect member 930 rotates so as to rise. Accordingly, the sixth light shielding plate 916 is retracted from the detection unit of the sixth detection sensor 889, and the detection result of the sixth detection sensor 889 turns ON. Further, the seventh light shielding plate 926 is retracted from the detection section of the seventh detection sensor 897, and the detection result of the seventh detection sensor 897 is turned ON. That is, the effect control device 300 determines that the first center movable effect member 900, the second center movable effect member 910, and the third center movable effect member are based on the fact that both the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are OFF. It is possible to grasp that 920 and the fourth center movable effect member 930 are at the initial position.

  Therefore, the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 constitute the board rendering device 44, the first central movable rendering member 900, the second center movable rendering member 910, the third center movable rendering member 920, and the fourth center movable rendering. In addition to forming position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the member 930, the present invention switches the effect switch 47 for detecting the initial position.

  Then, in the operation completion state shown in FIG. 14, the decorative portion 901 of the first central movable effect member 900, the decorative portion 911 of the second central movable effect member 910, the decorative portion 921 of the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth center The decorative portion 931 of the movable effect member 930 is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the display device 41. Further, the end surfaces of the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, and 931 are opposed to and close to the end surfaces of the adjacent decorative portions 901, 911, 921, and 931 so as to form one annular shape as a whole. ing. Each of the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, and 931 is made of a material that does not transmit light, and the portion where the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, and 931 are located is in a state where the display of the display device 41 cannot be viewed from the front.

  Next, the configuration of the special fluctuation winning device 38 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 15 to 17, the special variable prize winning device 38 is disposed on a flow path rear wall 962 disposed along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and on the front side of the flow path rear wall 962. The flow path 38f is provided between the flow path front wall 952 and the flow path 38f in which the game balls can flow down in a line. The downflow path 38f is inclined so as to descend to the left when viewed from the front side, so that the game balls flow down in a single row toward the left.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, a bottom surface of a substantially central portion of the downflow path 38f is constituted by an opening / closing member 990 that can slide in the front-rear direction. The opening / closing member 990 protrudes forward as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (a) and is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won in the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening 38d), and FIG. 17 (b). As shown in the figure, the state can be converted into an open state in which a game ball can be retracted to the special winning opening 38d to be able to win. That is, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is closed and passes through the special winning opening 38d, and when the opening / closing member 990 is open. It is designed to flow into the special winning opening. When the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, there is a gap between the opening and closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952, but the gap is such that a game ball cannot enter.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the special fluctuation winning device 38 includes a front wall member 950 having a flow path front wall 952, a rear wall member 960 having a flow path rear wall 962, and a main body 970 to which an opening / closing member 990 and the like are attached. , A cover member 979 that covers the back surface of the main body 970.

  The front wall member 950 includes a plate-shaped front portion 951. The front surface of the front portion 951 is arranged close to the rear surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game balls do not flow down in front of the front surface. The front surface of the front portion 951 is a surface that can be visually recognized by a player, and is a lens that is decorated and partially transmits light. On the back surface of the front wall member 950, an LED (not shown) is arranged as a decoration means, so that the special fluctuation winning device 38 can be decorated with light. The color of the light for decorating the special fluctuation winning device 38 is different from the emission color of the collective display device 50, thereby preventing the display of the adjacent collective display device 50 from being difficult to understand. The upper part of the plate-shaped front part 951 is a flow path front wall 952 that forms a front side wall of the flow-down path 38f.

  As shown in FIG. 16, a plurality of front wall protrusions 954 protruding rearward are provided on the back surface side of the flow path front wall 952. The front wall protruding portion 954 is a triangular prism-shaped protruding portion in which the left and right sides are inclined, and is located slightly upstream of the protruding portion 992 in front of each of the plurality of protruding portions 992 provided on the opening / closing member 990. Is provided. The front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 have a function of guiding a game ball flowing down to the left backward in order to meander a game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f as described later. That is, it forms a contact portion to which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f can contact. Since the front wall protrusion 954 is located slightly upstream, the game ball flowing to the left is guided backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and then further back by the protrusion 992, The game balls can be effectively guided.

  As shown in FIG. 19, a plurality of rib-shaped extension walls 953 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-shaped front portion 951 are provided on the back surface side of the front wall member 950. The function of the extension wall 953 differs depending on the location where the extension wall 953 is provided. A guide channel forming portion 953c for forming a guide channel 955 for guiding a game ball winning the opening 38d, a switch mounting portion forming portion 953d for forming a mounting portion 956 for mounting the special winning switch 38a, and a general winning opening 35. The general winning opening forming part 953e, which has a function as a peripheral wall 953f for preventing a game ball flowing down around the special fluctuation winning device 38 from entering the inside.

  The bottom surface portion 953a that forms the bottom surface of the flow-down path 38f is an inclined surface that is inclined rightward when viewed from the back surface side. The special winning opening forming part 953b is inclined so as to collect the game balls flowing into the special winning opening 38d into the guiding flow path 955. Game balls can flow in a line in the guiding flow path 955, and a large winning opening switch 38 a is provided in a part flowing into the guiding flow path 955. As a result, all the game balls flowing into the special winning opening 38d flow into the guiding flow path 955 after being detected by the special winning opening switch 38a. The guiding flow path 955 formed by the guiding flow path forming part 953c is a flow path for guiding the game ball from the special winning opening 38d to the back side of the game board 30. Ribs 957 are formed to guide the ribs 957. The general winning opening forming unit 953e forms a general winning opening 35 that opens rightward when viewed from the front side of the special variable winning device 38. A rib 958 is formed on the rear surface of the front portion 951 to guide the game ball flowing into the general winning opening 35 backward.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, the rear wall member 960 includes a plate-shaped rear surface portion 961. A front wall member 950 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and a portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 that is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. An upper portion of the rear surface portion 961 is a flow path rear wall 962 that forms a rear side wall of the downflow path 38f. In addition, an opening / closing member insertion portion 963 penetrating back and forth for inserting the opening / closing member 990 from the back surface side of the rear wall member 960 is formed at a position serving as a lower end of the flow path rear wall 962.

  In addition, a plurality of rear wall protrusions 964 protruding forward are provided on the front side of the flow path rear wall 962. As shown in FIG. 16, the rear wall protrusion 964 is a triangular prism-shaped protrusion having left and right side surfaces inclined, and is provided at a position adjacent to a plurality of recesses 993 provided in the opening / closing member 990. The rear wall protruding portion 964 and the concave portion 993 have a function of guiding a game ball flowing to the left to the front so as to meander a game ball flowing down the flow path 38f as described later. That is, it forms a contact portion to which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f can contact. Since the rear wall protruding portion 964 is provided adjacent to the concave portion 993, the game ball can be prevented from flowing down the right portion of the downflow path 38f in a portion where the concave portion 993 is not provided, and the game ball can be reliably removed. It becomes possible to meander.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the guiding channel 955 communicates with the back surface of the rear surface 961 at the center portion of the rear surface 961 and at the portion of the front wall member 950 facing the portion where the guiding channel 955 is formed. A penetrating portion 968 penetrating back and forth is formed at the front end. Above the guide channel 955, a switch mounting portion 965 that penetrates back and forth so as to accommodate the rear portion of the special winning opening switch 38a is formed. Further, the right side portion of the rear surface portion 961 and the portion of the front wall member 950 opposite to the portion where the general winning opening 35 is formed, the game ball winning the general winning opening 35 is transferred to the back side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966a penetrating back and forth is formed so as to communicate the general winning opening channel 966 to be guided to the rear surface side of the rear surface portion 961.

  As shown in FIG. 20B, a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 967 extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 961 are provided on the rear surface side of the rear wall member 960. The function of the extension wall 967 differs depending on the location where the extension wall 967 is provided. The extension wall 967 a forms a guidance flow path 955, the general winning opening flow path forming section 967 b forms a general winning opening flow path 966, It has a function as a peripheral wall 967c that forms the periphery of the special fluctuation winning device 38.

  The guide channel forming portion 967a forms the guide channel 955 so as to guide the game balls guided from the through portion 968 to the back side downward. Further, a rib 969 for guiding a game ball backward is formed at a downstream end of the guiding flow path 955 formed on the rear surface portion 961. The general winning port flow path forming portion 967b forms a general winning port flow path 966 so as to guide the game balls guided from the through portion 966a to the back side downward. Further, a rib 966b for guiding a game ball backward is formed at a downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed on the rear surface portion 961.

  The peripheral wall 967c is formed in accordance with the shape of a penetrating portion formed in a portion of the game board main body 80 where the special variable prize winning device 38 is attached, and penetrating in the front and rear direction. When this occurs, the peripheral wall 967c is in a state of being inserted into the through portion. In addition, the back surface of the rear surface portion 961 located outside the peripheral wall 967c comes into contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the special variable winning device 38 is attached to the game board main body 80. In this portion, a plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed.

  As shown in FIG. 21, main body 970 includes a peripheral wall 971 that matches front and rear with peripheral wall 967c of rear wall member 960. The main body portion 970 includes a rear wall portion 972 that faces the guide flow path forming portion 967 a formed on the back surface of the rear wall member 960 and forms a rear wall of the guide flow path 955. In the rear wall portion 972, a game ball guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the penetration portion 968 is provided to the guide channel 955 at a position facing the through portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960. There is formed a rib 973 that guides right along. In the rear wall portion 972, a penetrating portion 974 that penetrates back and forth is formed at a position facing the downstream end of the guide flow path 955 formed in the rear wall member 960. The game ball flowing down the guide channel 955 is guided rearward by the rib 969 formed on the rear wall member 960, passes through the penetrating portion 974, is guided to the back side of the main body 970, and is outside the gaming machine. Into the discharge passage for discharging the water.

  In addition, a portion facing the downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed on the rear wall member 960 has a through hole for guiding a game ball flowing down the general winning opening channel 966 to the back side of the main body 970. A part 975 is formed. The game ball flowing down the general winning opening channel 966 is guided to the back side of the main body 970 through the penetrating portion 975, detected by the winning opening switch 35a, and then discharged to discharge the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine. It is designed to flow into the road.

  An opening / closing member holding portion 976 that guides and supports an opening / closing member 990 that operates in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed on the rear wall member 960. The opening / closing member holding portion 976 is a slit-shaped penetrating portion that penetrates the front and rear of the main body portion 970, and can contact the upper, lower, left, and right surfaces of the opening / closing member 990, and can guide and support the opening / closing member 990. A guide wall 977 is provided so as to extend in the front-rear direction.

  An opening / closing member unit 980 including an opening / closing member 990 and an operation mechanism for operating the opening / closing member 990 is attached to the back surface side of the main body 970. The opening / closing member unit 980 includes a unit base member 981 for attaching various members, an opening / closing member 990 slidable in the front-rear direction, and a special winning opening solenoid 38b for operating the opening / closing member 990.

  This opening / closing member unit 980 has a state in which the special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed with the opening / closing member 990 protruding forward as shown in FIG. 22A, and a state in which it is opened and closed as shown in FIG. The opening / closing member 990 can be converted into a state where the member 990 is retracted rearward and the state where the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened. The opening / closing member 990 can appear above the big winning opening 38d via an opening / closing member holding portion 976 formed in the main body 970 and an opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960.

  The opening / closing member 990 is slidably provided on a holding portion 982 formed above the unit base member 981 so as to be able to slide back and forth. As shown in FIG. 23A, the opening / closing member 990 is configured such that the front end portion extending above the special winning opening 38d on the upper surface is lower by one step to form a flow path forming portion 991 that forms the bottom surface of the flow-down path 38f. ing.

  A plurality of protruding portions 992 protruding upward are formed in the vicinity of the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 in the flow path forming portion 991. The upstream side surface of the protruding portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side is directed to the downstream side, so that the game ball flowing down from the right can be smoothly guided rearward toward the concave portion 993. Further, the downstream side surface of the protruding portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side is directed to the upstream side, so that when a game ball flowing forward from the concave portion 993 comes into contact, it can be guided in the downstream direction.

  A recess 993 in which the step portion is recessed rearward is formed in a step portion of the flow path forming portion 991 which is one step lower, and which faces the protruding portion 992 in the sliding direction. The distance between the side surface of the step portion forming the concave portion 993 and the side surface of the protruding portion 992 is such that the gaming balls can flow down in a line at any position. Further, the side surface on the downstream side of the side surface of the step portion forming the concave portion 993 is formed obliquely so that the front side is directed to the downstream side, so that the game ball can smoothly flow forward from the concave portion 993. I have.

  That is, the top surface of the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations such as the protrusions 992 and the recesses 993. As will be described later, such undulations allow the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 for a longer time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is an oblique surface descending to the left so that the game ball can flow down to the left. A sliding portion 994 extending downward is formed on the left and right sides of the lower surface of the opening / closing member 990. The sliding portion 994 is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction. It becomes slidable.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22A, the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 has an inclined surface 996 that is inclined such that the lower end is located rearward of the upper end. By forming the inclined surface 996 in this manner, when a game ball is present between the opening / closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952 when the opening / closing member 990 is closed, the game ball is raised. Alternatively, the game ball can escape downward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, a connecting portion 995 to which a driving arm 983 for transmitting a driving force from the special winning opening solenoid 38b for driving the opening / closing member 990 is formed at a central portion of a lower surface of the opening / closing member 990. ing. The drive arm 983 is located below the holding portion 982. As shown in FIG. 24B, a through-hole 982a through which a connection pin 983a extending upward from the drive arm 983 can be inserted is formed in the holding portion 982, and the connection pin 983a is opened and closed through the through-portion 982a. 990 is connected to the connection portion 995. Further, as shown in FIG. 24A, guide ribs 982b are formed on the holding portion 982 and are located on the left and right of the connection portion 995 and extend along the front-rear direction. The guide rib 982b guides the opening / closing member 990 in the front-rear direction by guiding the connecting portion 995 in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 25, one end of the drive arm 983 is connected to a connecting member 984 connected to the special winning opening solenoid 38b. The drive arm 983 is provided with a turning shaft 983b extending in the vertical direction, and is rotatable around the turning shaft 983b. The rotating shaft 983b is sandwiched from the front and rear by the main body 970 and the rear wall member 960, and is rotatably held (see FIG. 18).

  As shown in FIG. 25A, when the special variable winning device 38 is closed, the drive shaft 38g of the special winning opening solenoid 38b is extended, and the drive arm 983 is located at the front end of the rotation range. . In this state, the drive arm 983 is in a state of being rotated most clockwise about the rotation shaft 983b as viewed from the back side, and the connection pin 983a is located at the front end of the movement range.

  When the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened from this state, the drive arm 983 is retracted to retract the drive shaft 38g of the special winning opening solenoid 38b so that the drive arm 983 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 983b as viewed from the back side. The opening / closing member 990 is retracted backward by moving the connecting pin 983a backward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the special variable winning device 38 is brought into an open state. When closing the special fluctuation winning device 38, the operation reverse to the above-described operation is performed.

  FIGS. 26 to 29 show the manner in which the game balls flow down in the special fluctuation winning device 38. FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 are views in which a part of the front wall member 950 is seen through for explanation. The game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f from right to left is first guided diagonally forward by the rear wall projection 964 located at the most upstream side, and flows into the flow path forming section 991 of the opening / closing member 990. Then, it is guided obliquely rearward by the front wall protrusion 954 and diagonally rearward by the protrusion 992 of the opening / closing member 990 and flows into the recess 993. The game ball that has flowed into the concave portion 993 is guided diagonally forward again by the downstream side surface of the concave portion 993 formed obliquely toward the downstream side and the front wall protrusion 954 adjacent to the downstream side.

  Thereafter, the diagonally backward guidance by the front wall projection 954 and the projection 992 and the diagonally forward guidance by the recess 993 and the rear wall projection 964 are repeated, and the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f meanders back and forth. While flowing down. Accordingly, the time of staying on the opening / closing member 990 becomes longer than in the case where the front wall protruding portion 954, the rear wall protruding portion 964, the protruding portion 992, the concave portion 993, and the like do not rise and fall linearly. It will be. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 (a), a game ball is always present on the opening / closing member 990, and even if the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short, the opening / closing member 990 is opened. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), there is a high possibility that the game ball existing on the opening / closing member 990 falls and wins the special winning opening 38d, and even if the opening is short, the player wins. Can be expected. In addition, it is preferable to secure a time necessary for the game ball to be in a state of staying on the opening / closing member 990 with respect to the interval time for closing the special variable winning device 38 before the round in which the short opening is performed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 comes into contact with the protrusion 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990. As shown in FIG. 30 (b), the player jumps and is guided away from the special winning opening 38d. Further, the bouncing game balls may come further away from the special winning opening 38d by coming into contact with the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, or the like. Further, since the protrusions 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990 are arranged at intervals so that the game balls can pass through, they may fall without contacting the protrusions 992 through this interval. The opening time of the special variable prize winning device 38 in the case of a short opening described later is a time during which even a game ball that bounces in contact with the protruding portion 992 or the like as described above can flow into the special winning opening 38d. ing. Thus, even if the opening is short, it is possible to flow into the special winning opening 38d.

  By providing the protruding portion 992, the front wall protruding portion 954, and the rear wall protruding portion 964 in this manner, the rolling mode of the game ball when the opening / closing member 990 is opened becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. . Further, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the timing of inflow of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening / closing member 990 into the special winning opening 38d can be shifted, so that the ball is clogged in the special winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

  In addition, although the front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, the protrusion 992, and the recess 993 are provided on the flow-down passage 38f as undulations, other structures may be used. For example, a meandering groove may be formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 as undulation, and the game ball may flow down while meandering along the groove. In addition, a rib-shaped protrusion or groove is provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 as an undulation so as to be substantially perpendicular to the flow-down direction, so that when the game ball flows down, it flows down while being moved up and down by the protrusion or groove. You may do it.

  As described above, the game board 30 including the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the starting area (the first starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, the second starting winning port) provided in the game area 32 is provided. 97) a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on a winning of a game ball to the game ball, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The machine includes a special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be won, and is converted into an open state in a special game state. An opening / closing member that allows a game ball to win from an opening facing upward, and closes the opening in a closed state to disable the winning of the game ball, and opens the opening in the open state to enable the winning of the game ball. 990 In the closed state, the game ball can flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990, and the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations (protrusions 992, concave portions 993) on the upper surface, so that the opening / closing can be performed more than when there is no undulation. This means that the time for which the game ball stays on the upper surface of the member 990 is made longer. Therefore, a decrease in the number of game balls during the special game state can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, contact portions (front wall protrusion 954, rear wall protrusion 964) are provided around the flow passage 38f formed by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 so that game balls flowing down the flow passage 38f can contact. Will be. Therefore, the contact time of the game ball on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 becomes longer by contacting the contact portion, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game ball during the special game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

  Further, in the closed state, the game ball is configured to flow down from one of the left and right ends on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 to the other, and the undulation formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 causes the flowing game ball to move back and forth. It is formed so as to meander. Therefore, the time for which the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 becomes longer, so that the decrease in the game ball during the special game state can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Note that the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed by the opening and closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction. May be configured to rotate downward.

  In addition, a game board 30 including a game area 32 in which a game ball can flow down is provided, and a start area (a first start winning port 36, a normal variable winning apparatus 37, a second start winning port 97) provided in the game area 32 is provided. In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on a winning of a game ball and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a result of the variable display game is a special result, The game ball can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and has a special variable winning device 38 that is converted into an open state in a special game state. Game balls can be won from the facing opening, and in the closed state they protrude forward to close the opening, making it impossible for the game balls to be won. Enable The opening / closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction is provided as described above. In the closed state, the game ball can flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990. The opening and closing members 990 are provided so that the time that the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is longer than when there is no undulation, and the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 is perpendicular to the sliding direction toward the front end. In other words, the inclined surface 996 is formed such that the thickness in a certain direction is reduced.

  Therefore, the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations on the upper surface, and the time for which the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing member is made longer than when there is no undulation. Can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be increased. In addition, since the inclined surface 996 whose thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction decreases toward the front end is formed at the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being caught when closed.

  The upper surface of the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990 is a plane along the sliding direction, and a portion below the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being caught in the case of closing, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game ball during the special game state by being guided downward by the inclined surface 996, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. A CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110 with the input unit 120 and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. The CPU section 110 operates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock of a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to generate. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC from the 32 V DC voltage. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, which has a power failure monitoring circuit and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generating unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. Is provided, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the replacement.

  The backup power supply section 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the 32 V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 are forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the game microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  The ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence / absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is set, some of the plurality of display results are already derived and displayed at a stage where they are not yet displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure change display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure change display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the condition of the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, a state in which any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving the special result mode include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived (a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output the game machines. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generation circuit for generating random numbers for determining a variation pattern for determining reach and non-reach variable display, including a running time of a variable display game, and a hit random number for determining a hit of a normal map variable display game. And a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

  Further, in the process related to the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A acquires any one change pattern table from the plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines whether the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state of the special figure change display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state). State), the operating state of the normal fluctuation prize device 37 as the current gaming state (time saving operation state (normal power support state)), the number of stored start-ups, and the like. Select and acquire a fluctuation pattern table. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A constitutes a change distribution information obtaining means for obtaining any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. Control for paying out is performed. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball loan request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball rental.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36 a in the first starting winning port 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variable winning device 37. 37a, a starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning port 97, a gate switch 34a in the general-purpose starting gate 34, a winning port switch 35a, and a special winning port switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 are connected to these switches. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from the IC and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that a lead wire of a sensor or a proximity switch is incorrectly short-circuited, a sensor or a switch is disconnected from a connector, or a lead wire is cut to be floating. It is configured to detect an abnormal state as described above and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are the second input. Input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. In addition, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a game sensor may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to a not-shown test test device via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a are input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V necessary for normal operation of the IC from the power supply device 400. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and a first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). A signal indicating whether or not 200 is ready to accept a command), an abnormal payout status signal (a status signal indicating abnormal payout), a shot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal based on the input signal and supplying the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  The input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are temporarily input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. The reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the trial shooting test device of the notifying agency (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting a signal line of a detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 has a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (generic solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. Is provided with a second output port 134 for outputting the opening / closing data. The output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal plate 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer), etc.) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a firing permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the general-purpose solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal based on a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , A second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a current for the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so as to drive a solenoid operated at 32V. In addition, 12 V DC is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by supplying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting a current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the sequentially selected LEDs to light them. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12V DC in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 450. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 450 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, a configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the gaming microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the above image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held, and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that is a timekeeping unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decoration lamp, And processes such as drive control of the solenoid and management of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into the production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the information display device 630. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15 is provided. In addition, a board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the board effect device 44 provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) is provided. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as the board effect device 44, the first lower movable member 740, 741, the second lower movable member 770, the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848, the second upper movable member 860, A first center movable effect member 900, a second center movable effect member 910, a third center movable effect member 920, and a fourth center movable effect member 930 are provided.

  These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. In addition, even if a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for controlling the drive of the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 detects an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 are detected. A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, and drives the motor and the solenoid. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from the launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of directional change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35. The first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 32 and from the game area 32. Is discharged. When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number corresponding to the type of the winning opening is determined. The prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 31).

  A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided in the general-purpose starting gate 34, and a game area 32 is provided. When the game ball hit inside passes through the ordinary start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34, the general figure starting memory number is an upper limit number (for example, four If it is less than ()), the number of ordinary figure start storages is added (+1) and one ordinary figure start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The stored number of the general-purpose starting prize is displayed on a general-purpose display of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (hit random value) for determining the result of the general-figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the general-figure start memory. Is to be done.

  Then, when there is a general-figure start memory and the general-figure fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the general-figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the general-figure fluctuation display game hits, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is changed to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the random number value for hit determination stored in the first map stored in the first place is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine a hit in the first game. Then, a process of starting the normal figure change display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the general-figure variation display game wins, and a specific result mode (general-figure specific result) is derived.

  In addition, the game control device 100 sets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns for a predetermined change time on a general-purpose display provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the general-purpose change display game. After the display during the general figure change, which is repeatedly displayed in the same order, is performed, a process of displaying the general figure change display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the general-purpose display is constituted by the display device 41, and for example, a numeral, a symbol, a character design, or the like is used as the normal identification information, and after the display is fluctuated for a predetermined time, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. You may.

  When the result of the normal symbol change display game is a hit, the lighting pattern which is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol which forms a special result mode on the normal symbol display corresponding to the type of hit is stopped. In addition to the display, the control is performed to operate the general-purpose solenoid 37c and open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control execution unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). In the case where the result of the general-floor variation display game is out of control, control is performed on the general-purpose display to display a lighting pattern as a result mode of the out-of-position.

  Further, the winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97, and the winning ball to the ordinary variable winning device 37 are respectively provided with a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 provided therein. The switch 37a is detected by the starting port 3 switch 97a. The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 sets a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) of the first start memories that form the start memories (special figure start memories) based on the winning in the first start winning opening 36. In addition to storing in the limit, the second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning in the second start winning opening 97 and the ordinary variable winning device 37 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). To memorize. Based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the ordinary variable winning device 37, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting storage information, respectively. , And the extracted random number value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory or the second start memory. The storage number of the start memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 2 hold display of the collective display device 50, and is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display. Is displayed. The information is also displayed on the information display device 630.

  When the first special figure change display game or the second special figure change display game is ready to be started, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first special figure change display game in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure change display game to be started. The random number for big hit determination and the determination value stored in the ROM 111B are compared with each other to perform a process of determining a hit or miss of the special figure change display game. Further, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variable display game to be executed.

  Then, when executing the first special figure change display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) for a predetermined change time. After the special figure 1 changing display is performed, a process of displaying the first special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. When the second special figure variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variable display device) for a predetermined variation time. After the special figure 2 changing display is performed, a process of displaying the second special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

  In the effect control device 300, based on a control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, A process of displaying a decoration special figure variation display game for varyingly displaying numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) is performed. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting an effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect relating to a game (such as a variable display game).

  In the decorative special figure change display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special design (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like on the display device 41 is displayed in the left change display area (first special design) and the right change display area ( In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed at a speed that is difficult to identify (high-speed fluctuation). Then, the symbols fluctuating after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. This is performed by displaying the result of the special figure change display game in a result mode constituted by the displayed identification information. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as appearance of a character are performed to enhance interest. In the decorative special figure variable display game on the information display device 630, the light emitting member blinks during the variable display, and when the stop time is reached, the light emitting member is changed to a light emitting mode (lighting, blinking, off) corresponding to the result of the special figure variable display game. Etc.). That is, the result mode is displayed by a decorative special symbol (fourth symbol) configured by the light emitting mode of the light emitting member.

  Then, when the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. In addition to displaying the lighting pattern, processing for generating a special game state and a small hitting game state is performed. In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 or the information display device 630 corresponding thereto also becomes the special result mode or the small hit result mode.

  In the process of generating the special game state and the small hitting game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, for example, to enter the game into the large winning opening. Control to enable the inflow of the ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the special winning opening, or until a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) of continuing (repeating) this a predetermined number of rounds is performed. That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that controls opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of which of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game is in the high probability state based on the result mode of the special figure change display game, the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game do not change. Both variable display games are in the high probability state.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (a specific game state, a normal figure high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure change display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of being a winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general-figure probability) is set to a high probability (general-figure high-probability state) higher than 0 which is a normal probability (general-figure low-probability state). Is possible. Thereby, the opening time of the normal fluctuation prize device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is in the low probability state in the ordinary figure. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the ordinary figure probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state.

  Further, in the time-saving state, the execution time of the general-floor display game (normal-figure fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, the general-figure stop time for displaying the result of the general-figure fluctuating display game is, for example, 600 msec, When the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time of the first stop symbol (normal electric opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec × 1 time), The opening time of the second hit stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the opening time of the third hit symbol (normal time of opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 3 times).

  It should be noted that the execution time of the general-figure variation display game, the general-figure stop time, the number of times of the general-figure release, and the general-family release time are appropriately set so that the general-figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time saving operation state. For example, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described general-floor variation display game (general-purpose variation time) to be a second variation time shorter than the first variation time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is set to be shorter than the first stop time). 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is released as a result of the general fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is changed to the first time in the normal state (low normal probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening of ordinary power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game. The number of times (for example, four times) can be set to the second number of times of opening. Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of becoming a hit result in the general-figure variation display game (normal-figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal-figure low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. It is possible to set a probability (normally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the time-saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing any one or more of the general figure fluctuation time, the general figure stop time, the number of times of general power opening, the general time opening time, and the general probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. In addition, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated simultaneously, or only one of them can be generated.

  Note that the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display. However, each special figure change display is performed independently or not simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use different display devices or different display areas in the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decoration special figure change display game is displayed independently and not simultaneously. In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may not be provided in the gaming machine 10, and the special figure change display game may be executed only by the display device 41. In the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variable display game is not distinguished from the second special figure variable display game, it is simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning port 97 The switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are provided with a coil for detecting magnetism. Type magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. The glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 and the like include micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 37 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, first, processing for inhibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, the value of a register or the like is saved at the start address of the area for saving. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order. In step S4, the leading 00h is set. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is executed. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a target of validity determination) of the RAM that is not a target of validity determination (calculation of a checksum). Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that the initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if such a troublesome operation is not performed, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be detected. Can be prevented.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (Step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (Steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via a port and a data bus to set the number of times of checking (for example, two times) (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (Step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this manner, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at the time of turning on the power. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so that backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 is determined. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has ended, access to a readable and writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), And outputs the OFF data to all output ports (sets no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port mounted in the gaming microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15), and read first. It is determined whether the initialization switch has been turned on from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

  If the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If (Step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (Step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and power-off time are determined. It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the flow shifts to step S21 in FIG. 34 to perform the processing in the case where the power supply has been normally restored.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 34 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make

  In step S21 of FIG. 34, an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure is saved in an area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is capable of accepting the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is changed to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure change display game is the high probability state (step S22). If the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S25. If the special map is in the high probability state (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error display) provided on the game board 30 is provided. Is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S25), and step S31 is performed. Proceed to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, first, a model designation command is transmitted, and further, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a power failure recovery command, a screen specification command (waiting for customer) If this is the case, send multiple commands, such as a command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise a command for the recovery screen). Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, if the process jumps from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to be permitted to access (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in an area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, first, in step S30, a model designation command is transmitted, and further, a special figure 1 reserved number command, a special figure 2 reserved number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed). Along with displaying the command, a plurality of commands such as a command for performing notification of RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. That is, a model designation command is first transmitted to the effect control device 300 both when the power is restored and when the RAM is initialized. The information is transmitted first to the device 300.

  In step S31, a process of starting a timer interrupt signal and a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit for generating a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to make any setting.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers corresponding thereto (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining a hit symbol of a special figure) RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number for determining the hit of normal symbol (hit random number), random number for determining the hit symbol of normal symbol (hit symbol random number) After saving in the area (step S33), an interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit random number, the small hit random number, the hit random number, and the hit random number are processed by the program. The “low-speed counter” is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the case of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is used in which a start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes round. "Has been adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in a range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step S35, the number of times (for example, two times) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S36). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number updating process (step S35), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition, the initial value random number updating process in step S35 may be a method of performing an initial value random number updating process in a timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid the execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and only the main process is performed, there is no problem if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process, so that the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, interrupt interruption is temporarily prohibited (step S39). A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off (step S43) and a process of saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. Thus, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power-off, it is possible to determine whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power-off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control apparatus when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time.

  In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure. When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured such that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit Initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C, and reads the operation state of the initialization means before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits the access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 35 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the above-described main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculation value (step S53). . The number of bytes of the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and the checksum is updated. It is determined whether the calculation has been completed (step S57). If the calculation has not been completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and repeats the above processing. If the calculation has been completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 36 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number updating process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62). Then, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number updating process ends.
Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a big hit stop symbol of the special figure change display game, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is a small hit of the special figure change display game. This is the random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the stop symbol. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number which is an initial value of a random number which determines the hit of the ordinary figure variation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number which determines the hit stop symbol of the ordinary figure variation display game. It is a random number that becomes the initial value. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be improved by continuing to increment the initial random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.
It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not exist in the model without the small hit. Some gaming machines do not have a winning symbol initial value random number.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 37 is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step S103) is performed in which inputs from various sensors and switches and signals are fetched, that is, a state of each input port is read. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) and the like is performed. When the signal of the firing stop is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal of the firing permission is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal is set to the enabled state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no processing of the signal or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (the firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (Step S105) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (Step S106), and a random number update process 2 (Step S107) are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the ordinary gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 38a. Or a winning opening switch / status monitoring process for monitoring an error (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) (step S108). In addition, special figure game processing (step S109) for performing processing relating to the special figure fluctuation display game, and general figure game processing (step S110) for performing processing relating to the general figure fluctuation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111) for driving a segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display a special figure change display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, and the magnetic sensor 61 Fraudulent magnet monitoring process (step S112) for checking the detection signal from the controller and determining whether there is any abnormality, and fraudulent radio wave for checking the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality. A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. Automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Some gaming machines require an instruction to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank, depending on the CPU used.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports (input port 1), the state of the bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the address of the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). ), The address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126). If there is an inverted bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is stored. Is prepared (step S127), and a switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value to a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set to an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the address of the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverted bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data Is prepared (step S132), switch reading processing (step S133) is performed, and the input processing is terminated.

Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, although the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data, the data may have the same value as a result. is there.
The inverted bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the inverted bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, but as a result, the data may have the same value. is there.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step S142), and the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143). Is saved (step S144). Thereafter, it waits until a delay time (for example, about 100 μsec) elapses until the second reading (step S145).

  When the delay time has elapsed, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read for the second time (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is set. Is saved (step S149). Then, in the first and second readings, a fixed bit pattern is created in which the same bit is set to 1 and the different bit is set to 0 (step S150), and the logical AND of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is calculated. It is set as a fixed bit (step S151).

  Next, an undefined bit pattern in which the same bit is set to 0 and the different bit is set to 1 in the first and second readings is created (step S152), and the logic between the undefined bit pattern and the determined state at the time of the previous interrupt is created. The product is taken and set as a previously held bit (step S153). This makes it possible to obtain the state of the signal from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined, saved as the current determined state (step S154), exclusive ORed between the previous and current determined states, and saved as a rising edge (step S155). Then, the switch reading process ends.

  When a timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once each time the interrupt is processed, and the signal is read by comparing the result with the result of the previous read. There is a method of determining whether or not the state has changed. However, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, a correct determination may not be performed. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, the above-described problem can be avoided.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the output processing, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 for outputting the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the general-purpose solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the digit counter value is obtained (step S163). S164). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (eg, “door / frame open” data, “security signal” data) is output to a digit / external information output port. 136 (step S166).
Then, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). In the present embodiment, for example, the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, the general figure display, the special figure 1 reservation display, the special figure 2 reservation, which are various kinds of displays provided in the collective display device 50, are provided. The display, the general-purpose hold display, the round display, and the second game state display are dynamically lit.

  Subsequently, various output data of the external information are combined (step S169), and the combined data (for example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", and "big hit signal 3" 4), the data of the “symbol confirmation frequency signal”, the data of the “start-up opening signal”, the data of the “main prize ball signal” and the output data of the firing permission (step S170). The output is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information and the emission permission signal (step S171). Next, data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S172). Thereafter, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

  Next, data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S174). Further, data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the payout command transmission processing, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize to which a payout command has not been transmitted yet. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Winning data corresponding to a prize ball in which the main prize ball signal is not generated in the used area is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 outputs a payout prize ball signal every time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals, it is possible to monitor an illegal payout.

Each of the winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in the present embodiment, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and fourteen winning balls). Is provided, and the count value of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that the winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted irrespective of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the transmission of the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in each of the three winning ball counter areas, the ten winning ball counter areas, and the fourteen winning ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1. Each of the three prize ball counter areas, the ten prize ball counter areas, and the fourteen prize ball counter areas in the winning number counter area 2 is configured to store up to 255 wins.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not. If there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. A determination is made (step S183). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 to repeat the above processing. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 is updated. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the value is equal to or larger than 0 (step S189; Y), the value of the main award ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, each time the number of remaining prize balls reaches 10, the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the result of the subtraction is saved in the award ball remaining area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls during a big hit or the like is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed at the same time as the payout of the game balls, and the accurate It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of award balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processing of steps S181 to S191 is processing for updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the processing of steps S192 to S201 is processing for transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal turns on (busy state). Is done. In other words, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted every time the timer is interrupted, but a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay out the prize ball. When it is in the state, a payout command is transmitted. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command is not performed, so that the useless processing is performed. Prevention and reduce the burden of control.

  Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the ON state (busy state) include, for example, during a payout operation, during a ball lending operation, during a shot ball out error, during an overflow error, during a frame radio wave illegal occurrence, during a payout ball detection switch (paid out). Counting the number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a dropped ball, during an underpayment error, during an overpayment error (the number of unpaid award balls = the number of remaining game balls) ) (When it is not 0).

  If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not.

  When there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. A determination is made (step S197). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and repeats the above processing. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. Is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written into the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal output from the payout control unit (payout control device 200) indicating whether the payout control unit can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. Prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means when the prize ball command is issued.

  As described above, since the game control device 100 performs the control of transmitting the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, the prize is provided only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. A ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up on the payout control device 200. It is possible to realize accurate payout control without having a function for performing the payout.

[Random number update processing 1]
FIG. 42 shows a random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number update process. In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). When the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is corresponded. It is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding a start value of a random number counter (random number area) to be executed (step S213). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the normal random number winning symbol is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small hit symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). Thereafter, it is determined whether the normal random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

  If the hit random number in the ordinary figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the winning symbol random number in the ordinary figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220). When the hit random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the initial random number of the hit is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the next initial value of the loaded random number of the ordinary figure is loaded. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number in the ordinary figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).

  When the winning symbol random number in the ordinary figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. If the winning symbol random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the winning symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S221). The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S222), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update processing 2]
FIG. 43 shows the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variable pattern random number 1) as the variable pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for the upper byte and the lower byte at different interrupts. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (the random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to:

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. When the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is “1”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is “2”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated. The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when “3”, the variation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is obtained from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether the random number has completed one cycle.

  Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as the gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as “R register”) used for refreshing the DRAM, etc. Includes a counter called "M1 counter" which operates in the same way as the R register, but loads the value of the M1 counter (step S234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to random numbers. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value is different from the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. When updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area (random number counter) is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte is used as the added value (hereinafter, this is referred to as “the additional value”). Is referred to as a "masked value") and a mask update value obtained by adding "1" to the mask update value, the lower one byte is set to "0" (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper one byte of the two-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper one byte is set to "0" and the lower one byte is set to the mask update value as an added value ( Step S238) and proceed to step S239. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may become “0”, and if “0” is added later, the value does not change from the value before the addition. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If the random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), And proceed to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper one byte of the random number value, and the value (1) of the random number area to be updated is set as the lower one byte of the random number value. Byte) (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in a lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new new random value (step S244), and this value is set to 1 The data is saved in a random number area lower than the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number area is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 ends. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, the value is saved) in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), And terminates the random number update processing 2.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1 byte random number, 2 byte random number (upper), 2 byte random number (lower)) are stored in the rendering random number update table. , The address of the update area, etc. are defined for the type of random number to be updated (four blocks).

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Accordingly, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls into the startup winning opening 36 and the startup area of the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for the purpose.

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
FIG. 44 shows the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the winning opening switch 38a in the winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the winning opening is open. In spite of the fact that there is no illegal winning in the special winning opening, a fraud & winning monitoring process (step S304) for detecting a normal winning is executed.

  The winning opening monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to a target switch, a lower address of illegal monitoring information, a lower address of an illegal winning number area, an illegal winning error notification command, an illegal winning error. The upper limit of the number (the number of fraud occurrence determination), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the information of the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. The winning table of the winning opening monitoring table includes, in addition to the number of times of monitoring (the number of switches), a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and a winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each switch to be monitored.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the public telephone is prepared (step S305), and fraud & winning monitoring processing for monitoring for an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning is performed. (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches (for example, the opening opening 1 switch 36a, the opening opening 3 switch 97a, and the opening opening switch 35a for the general winning opening 35) that does not require the fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S307). A winning number counter updating process for updating the number (step S308) is performed.

  Next, the status scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the switches and signals whose status is to be monitored and which of the signals is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting a state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining whether an error has occurred or not is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, and if the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality output due to occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector or the like. Monitoring of the state based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, monitoring of the state based on the shot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the dispensing abnormal status signal is set. You.

  Next, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining whether an error has occurred or not is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 so that if the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. When state monitoring is set and the value of the state scan counter is “1”, state monitoring based on a signal output from the body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is performed. Is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine for determining whether an error has occurred or not is determined. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, and if the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector or the like. Monitoring of the state based on two signals is set. Note that the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 does not define the case where the state scan counter is "1" to "3".

  After that, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control can be started (step S317), and ends the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated every timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing of steps S315 to S317 is performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning surveillance processing]
FIG. 45 shows the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306) in the winning port switch / status monitoring process described above. This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the large winning port switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. As for the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) and the ordinary electric power (normal fluctuation winning device 37), it is easy to force the player to open the opening / closing member, insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball, and therefore, the detection of the prize. In addition to monitoring for fraud.

  In the fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be monitored for error is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S322). The irregularity monitoring period is a period other than the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning switch for error monitoring is the special winning switch 38a, and the winning switch for error monitoring is started. In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, this is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is being executed based on the hit of the ordinary figure.

  If it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). If there is an input at the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324). It is determined whether there is (Step S325).

  In the case of the present embodiment, the number of unauthorized occurrence determinations is set to 5 irrespective of the type of winning opening switch to be monitored for error, but the number of incorrect occurrences is defined differently for each type of winning opening switch. You can also. The reason why the determination number is set to five is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball is in the valid period of the large winning opening switch. This is because when a prize is passed after passing through, or when noise is added to the signal, it is not determined that the signal is illegal, and it is not easy to determine that the signal is incorrect even though it is not illegal.

  If the number of illegal winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of monitored fraud occurrences (step S325; N), a winning port monitoring table for the target winning port switch is prepared (step S330). If the number of illegal winnings is equal to or larger than the number of monitored fraud occurrences (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is set to the number of fraudulent occurrences determined (step S326), and the initial value is set in the target fraud winning notification timer area. (For example, 60000 ms) (step S327). Next, a target fraudulent command is prepared (step S328), a fraud prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). ).

  On the other hand, when it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning port monitoring table of the target winning port switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process for setting a winning ball (step S331). Do. If the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333). If the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already expired, the target unauthorized release command is prepared (step S334), and the unauthorized winning release flag is set as the unauthorized flag. Prepare (step S335). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

  If the value of the notification timer has become 0 (step S336; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer has become 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( In step S337, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). If the value of the notification timer is not the moment when the value of the notification timer has become 0 (step S336; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer has become 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is set as a target. The value is compared with the value of the invalid flag area (step S338).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S339), and the effect command setting processing is performed. (Step S340), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. With the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an unauthorized winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
FIG. 46 shows a winning counter updating process (steps S308 and S331) in the winning port switch / status monitoring process and the fraud & winning monitoring process described above. In the winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is obtained from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and it is determined whether there is an input (exactly, an input change) in the target winning port switch. A determination is made (step S352).

  If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). When there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). If an overflow has occurred (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for the winning ball (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

  After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). Then, it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). If an overflow has occurred (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0 to 255).

  If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (Step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (Step S352). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is completed. Through the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the information of the winning is stored.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 47 shows the gaming machine state check processing (steps S311, S313, S316) in the above described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. In this gaming machine state check processing, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step S371), and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

  Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table (winning port switch / game machine status monitoring table prepared in the status monitoring process). This information includes, for example, a lower address of the head address of the state monitoring area, a lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area in which the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only bits of the target signal, and a signal. Judgment data of ON, status OFF command (in the case of an error, an error notification end command is performed), status ON command (in the case of an error, an error notification start command is performed), status OFF monitoring timer comparison value, status ON monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

  If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S373), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S374). Thereafter, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (step S375), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is not ON (step S372; N) is a state in which an error-related signal indicates that there is no error (normal), and a signal from the touch switch indicates that the touch is not performed. is there.

  On the other hand, if the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), a state ON flag is prepared as a state flag (step S376), and a target state ON command is acquired and prepared (step S377). Then, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is ON (step S372; Y) is a state indicating that an error-related signal indicates an error (abnormal or illegal), and a signal from the touch switch indicates that a touch has been made. It is a state which shows.

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S379; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the state of the current signal (step S379; N), that is, if the state of the signal changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step S380). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S382). Step S383).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state check processing ends. When the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by −1, and the status monitoring timer is kept at the value of the comparison value −1 (step S384). The status flag thus set is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

  If the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S385; Y), the game machine state check processing ends. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the production command setting processing is performed. (Step S387) to end the gaming machine state check processing. As a result, the state-off command prepared in step S374 or the state-on command prepared in step S377 is transmitted to effect control device 300.

[Payment busy signal check processing]
FIG. 48 shows the payout busy signal check processing (step S317) in the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing described above. In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). Note that the payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is ON (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S393). It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S395). It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

  If the value in the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399). When the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or S395 (step S400). If the value is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check processing ends. If the value is equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by −1, and the busy signal monitoring timer is kept at the value of the comparison value −1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check processing ends.

  By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, the busy signal status is not changed immediately even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, and the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and And so on.

  Also, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and becomes an undefined state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. Thereby, when a power failure occurs and the vehicle is recovered from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. In response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 being continuously output for a predetermined period, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 transmits the prize ball command after securely receiving that the prize ball command is received and immediately confirming that the payout process is possible, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. Can be prevented from being inadvertent.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game processing (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the input of the starting port 3 switch 97a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure change display game, and the setting of the special figure display are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the special figure game process, first, a start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a, the start-up 2 switch 37a, and the start-up 3 switch 97a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of a game ball in the first starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, and the second starting winning port 97, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted and the winning is determined. At the stage before the start of the special figure change display game based on the special figure, the game result preliminary determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is “0” (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number is obtained using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is “0”, the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the fluctuation start and the effect of the special figure fluctuation display game are set. A special map ordinary process (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the special figure stop display time, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the big winning port of each big hit A special figure display process (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

If the special figure game processing number is “3” in step A7, the opening time of the special winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing is set. The processing during the fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "4", an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the big winning opening or the big hit end processing is executed. A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
If the special figure game processing number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary processing is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to perform the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hitting A small hit fanfare medium process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
If the special figure game processing number is "8" in step A7, a small hitting middle process (step A16) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like is performed. .
If the special figure game processing number is "9" in step A7, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining sphere winning in the big winning opening during the small hitting processing, and the small hit ending processing The remaining small ball processing (Step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the above is performed.
If the special figure game processing number is "10" in step A7, a small hit end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary processing is performed.

  Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol variation control processing (step A20) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step A22) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the special figure game processing is ended. I do. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not “0” (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is used. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). The condition device not operating means that the above-described flag is not set, for example, in a case where the small hit lottery is won. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having various meanings.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the starting port switch monitoring processing, first, a first starting port (first starting winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquiring process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, starting port 1 switch 36a), the jackpot random number extracted is loaded into the latch register to prepare it, and the target starting port is set to the target starting port. Is set to indicate that there is a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first starting port, which is the starting port of the special figure 1 (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, when it is determined that there is a prize in the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is during working hours (under normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure is not working (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time reduction is in progress (step A104; Y), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. . That is, in the case of the time saving state, a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure change display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) does not win unless the player has left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless the player has right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game. However, when the first starting port receives a prize during the time-saving state (ie, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-turn instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and to issue a notification (warning) to instruct the right control to be performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of suspension by the first starting port (first starting winning port 36) (step A107), the common process for the special figure starting port switch (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) win preparation table is prepared (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition processing, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, starting port 2 switch 37a), the jackpot random number extracted is loaded and prepared in the latch register, and the target starting port is set to the target starting port. Is set to indicate that there is a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the second starting port which is the starting port of the special figure 2 (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A111; N), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (normal fluctuation prize device 37) is operating, that is, the normal fluctuation It is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step is performed. The process proceeds to A114 to perform the subsequent processes. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a regular electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In step A113, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of frauds won in the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud determination number (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and a game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. Then, when the counted number of illegal winnings is equal to or more than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud is occurring.

  If it is determined in step A113 that a normal telephone fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting information of suspension by the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). After performing the special process for the special figure starting port switch (step A115), the process proceeds to the process of step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. If it is determined in step A113 that unauthorized fraud has occurred (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, a third starting port (second starting winning port 97) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A116), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition processing, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, starting port 3 switch 97a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is set to the target starting port. Is set to indicate that there has been a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the third opening, which is the opening of FIG. 2 (step A118).
If it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning in the third opening (step A118; N), the opening switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A118 that there is a prize in the third opening (step A118; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special figure time reduction (general power support) (step A119). ).

If it is determined in step A119 that the special figure is not working (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A119 that the special figure is being shortened (step A119; Y), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and an effect command setting process (step A121) is performed. . That is, in the time saving state, a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A120) and an effect command setting process (step A121) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure change display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third starting port (the second starting winning port 97) does not win unless the player has left-handed, and does not win the normal variable winning device 37 unless the player has right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game. However, when the third starting port receives a prize during the time-saving state (that is, when a left-handed game is performed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-turn instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and to issue a notification (warning) to instruct the right control to be performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third starting port (the second starting winning port 97) (step A122), a special drawing starting port switch common process (step A123) is performed to monitor the starting port switch. The process ends.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110, A117) in the above-described start-up switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the first starting port (first starting winning port 36), the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37), and the third starting port (second starting winning port). Out of the ports 97), the non-winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A131), and among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a, the starting port to be monitored is set. It is determined whether there is an input to the switch (step A132).
Then, when there is no input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition processing ends.
On the other hand, if there is an input to the start switch to be monitored (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends.
If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A135). Then, of the first starting port (first starting winning port 36), the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37), and the third starting port (second starting winning port 97), the monitored starting port wins. The presence information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition processing ends.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure starting port switch common processing (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. The special process start port switch common process is a process that is performed in common for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are input.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the special figure starting port switch common process, first, among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a, the number of winnings to the monitored starting port switch The start port signal output count, which is the number of times that information about the game machine 10 is output to the external management device, is loaded (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142), and the output count overflows. Is determined (step A143).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A143; Y), the process proceeds to step A145. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows, so that no saving is performed.

Next, among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the monitored starting port switch is less than the upper limit value. A determination is made (step A145).
When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A145; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated by +1 ( Step A146), prepare a start port switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figure reservations (step A147), perform effect command setting processing (step A148), and execute the target startup port prize flag. Is saved (step A149). Subsequently, an address of a random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A150), and the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing in steps A102, A110, and A117 is calculated by RWM. (Step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A152), and is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This jackpot symbol random number is used in the special figure suspension information determination process (step A160).

  Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A154). Then, it is determined whether or not the first start opening (first start winning opening 36) is a winning (step A155). If it is determined in step A155 that the winning is not to the first starting port (step A155; N), the process proceeds to step A158. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A155 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A155; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A156), and the small hit symbol of the RWM is prepared. The data is saved in the random number storage area (step A157). In step A158, the address of the variable order flag storage area corresponding to the sum of the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations (any place from reservation 1 to 8) is calculated (step A158), and the calculated area is calculated. Then, the change order flag of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is saved (step A159), the special figure suspension information determination processing (step A160) is performed, and the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the first winning prize port 36, the second starting prize port 97, and the normal winning prize device 37 starting prize area. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as start memory which is a right to execute the variable display game. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls into the first start winning opening 36, which is the start opening of the special figure 1, with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Various random numbers, which are stored as the starting memory and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97 which is the starting opening of the special figure 2 or the normal variable winning device 37, are set to a predetermined number as an upper limit. Store as memory.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, details of the special figure hold information determination processing (step A160) in the above-described special figure starting port switch common processing will be described. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  As shown in FIG. 53, first, a big hit determination process (step A161) for determining whether or not a big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big random number value matches the big hit determination value is performed. If the result of the determination is a big hit (step A162; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step A163), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A152 is set. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A171.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a big hit (step A162; N), it is determined whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is won (step A165).
If it is determined in step A165 that the winning is not to the first starting port (step A165; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to step A171.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A165 that the winning is to the first starting opening (step A165; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value to determine whether the small hit is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A166) is performed to determine whether the small hit has occurred. If the result of the determination is not a small hit (step A167; N), the stop symbol information for the loss is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to step A171.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A167; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A168), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A156 is entered. It acquires (step A169) and shifts to the processing of step A171.

  Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A171), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A172). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A173) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step A173). A174).

  After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A175), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step A176), the special figure suspension information judgment processing ends. Note that the special figure information setting processing in step A173 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing in step A174 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary processing.

  With the above processing, a pre-reading symbol command including the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the starting memory of the pre-reading target and a pre-reading fluctuation pattern command including information on the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. Then, it is transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-reading result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is rendered before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The information related to the result can be notified to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game by, for example, changing the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to inform.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) to form a preliminary judgment means. In addition, the timing at which the random number value stored corresponding to the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning that the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Grand Winner Switch Monitoring]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring processing (step A2) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether the special winning opening process is being performed (step A201). . If the special winning opening is being processed (Y in step A201), the process proceeds to step A205. When the special winning opening process is not being performed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A201). A202).

  If the special winning port remaining ball is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning game remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether the small hitting medium processing is being performed (step A203). ). If the small hitting process is being performed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If it is not during the small hit processing (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A204). Since the special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer becomes "0", the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number.

  If the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing ends. If the small hit remaining sphere is being processed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Then, "0" is set to the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch (step A206).

  If there is no input to the special winning opening switch (step A206; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), and the effect command setting processing (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

When it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214), if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends.
If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A215).
If the special winning port remaining ball is being processed (step A215; Y), the special winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the special winning port remaining ball is not being processed (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step A216).
If the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A216; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and if the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter is changed to the big win. It is added to the mouth count (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the special winning mouth count is equal to or more than an upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, “9”) (step A218).

  If the special winning opening count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. When the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A219). (Step A220), it is determined whether the small hitting is being processed (Step A221). If the small hit is not being processed (step A221; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the small hit is being processed (step A221; Y), the small winning opening control pointer area is set to the small hit. The value of the opening operation end is saved (step A222), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

(Normal processing of special maps)
Next, details of the special figure ordinary processing (step A8) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special figure ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether both the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are “0” (step A301).
If it is determined in step A301 that both the number of reserved special figure 1 and the number of reserved special figure 2 are not “0” (step A301; N), a flag is loaded from the variable order flag storage area (for a total of 1 reserved number). Then (step A302), it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A303).
If it is determined in step A303 that the current fluctuation is a fluctuation in the special figure 1 (step A303; Y), a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step A304). The effect command setting processing (step A305) is performed, the special figure 1 change start processing (step A306) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends. At this point, the special figure 1 hold number has not been updated by −1, but in step A304, a command (decorative special figure hold number command) corresponding to the −1 updated value is prepared.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A303 that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2, A special command special figure holding number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), effect command setting processing (step A308) is performed, special figure 2 change start processing (step A309) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends. At this point, the special figure 2 hold number has not been updated by -1. However, in step A307, a command (decorative special figure hold number command) corresponding to the -1 updated value is prepared.

If it is determined in step A301 that both the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A301). In step A310), if the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (step A310; N), a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A311).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A312), and effect command setting processing (step A313) is performed.
Next, the process number is set to "0" which is related to the special figure ordinary process (step A314), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A315), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A315). Step A316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special figure ordinary processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 change start processing (step A306) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described. The special figure 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure change display game. As shown in FIG. 56, first, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321), and the first special figure is displayed. A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a big hit is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various kinds of information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game are set. (Step A325). After that, a fluctuation pattern setting process (Step A326) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting processing for setting fluctuation start information of the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.
Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).

  Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of the change of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value of the blink control timer (timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step A332). For example, 52 msec) is saved (step A333), the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 change start processing (step A309) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described. The special figure 2 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the second special figure change display game, and is the same as the processing in the special figure 1 change start processing shown in FIG. It is done as.

  As shown in FIG. 57, first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special figure is displayed. A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a big hit.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (Step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting processing for setting fluctuation start information of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.
Next, “1” for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).

  Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of the change of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (step A352). For example, 104 msec) is saved (step A353), the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variable symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start processing is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 58 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A361), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A362). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) of the RWM and prepared (step A363), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0. (Step A364). The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1). After that, a big hit determination process (step A365) for determining whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether or not the prepared big random number value matches the big hit determination value is performed.

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step A365) is a jackpot (step A366; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A362 (step A367). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is not a big hit (step A366; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit or not. Is performed (step A368).

  If the result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is a small hit (step A369; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the missed information was saved in step A361. (Step A370), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is not a small hit (step A369; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while the loss information is saved in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure change display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 59 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 change start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step A372). The reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage with the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 2). After that, a big hit determination process (step A374) for determining whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether or not the prepared big random number value matches the big hit determination value is performed.

  If the result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the missed information was saved in step A371 (step A375). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is not a jackpot (step A375; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends while saving the deviation information to the jackpot flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure change display game is one of “big hit” and “missing”.

[Big hit determination process]
FIG. 60 shows the big hit determination processing (steps A161, A365, and A374) in the above-described special figure hold information determination processing, the big hit flag 1 setting processing, and the big hit flag 2 setting processing. In the big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit determination value that is the lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. , Is determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A387), and the big hit judgment processing ends. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A365) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), it is out of order. Therefore, "other than the big hit (outlier)" is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (Step A382; N), it is determined whether the state is the high probability state (Step A383).

  If the state is the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit judgment value during the high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step A383; N), an upper limit judgment value during the low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386). .

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A357), and the big hit judgment processing ends. Specifically, when the big hit determination processing is the big hit determination processing (step A365) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing, when the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), Since it is a hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is out of order. Then, "other than the big hit (outlier)" is set as the determination result (step A387).
When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; N), that is, when it is a big hit, a big hit is set as a judgment result (step A388), and the big hit judgment processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
FIG. 61 shows the small hit determination processing (steps A166 and A368) in the above-described special figure hold information determination processing and the big hit flag 1 setting processing. In this small hit determination processing, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). Note that the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, the small hit upper limit. If it is equal to or less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit has occurred. Of course, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; Y), that is, if the big hit is a miss, a miss is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment processing ends.
When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set, and it is determined whether the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value. (Step A392).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (Step A392; Y), that is, when the big hit is a miss, a miss is set as the judgment result (Step A393), and the small hit judgment processing ends.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A394), and the small hit judgment processing ends. I do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 62 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step A323) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). ), And loads a jackpot symbol random number (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), and the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability variation determination is performed. The data is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409).

  These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts at the timing of a hit, and the shift destination of the effect mode to shift to after the end of the hit changes according to the type of the hit symbol (the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit). In addition, when a specific big hit symbol (for example, a 4R surely changing design) among the big hits in the special map 1 is used, the effect mode of the transition destination is determined to be a certain change depending on whether or not the game state is being changed. It is determined whether or not to enter the production mode, or to transition to the production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether or not it is a positive change. Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and if it is a small hit (step A411; Y), the special figure 1 small hit The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A411). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol number area (step A413).
Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of a loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern area. Save (step A417), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A419), and effect command setting processing (step A420) is performed. The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422), and the special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 63 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step A343) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reserved 1) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol number area (step A434). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), and the probability change determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained. The data is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A443), and effect command setting processing (step A444) is performed. The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446). The two-stop symbol setting process ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36), and the second start winning opening (normal variable winning). The variable display game executing means for executing the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure information setting processing (steps A173, A324, and A344) in the special figure suspension information determination processing, the special figure 1 change start processing, and the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of the fluctuation, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of the fluctuation. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time reduction state, the progress of the special figure change display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the special figure information setting process, first, a first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and a first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, the first-half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and offset data corresponding to the target number of reserved special figures and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the first-half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of suspensions, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating a first half fluctuation (a fluctuation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, when the number of reservations is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of out-of-office. In other cases, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first-half fluctuation. Note that a fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, a second half variable group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and a second half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
Next, a second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and offset data corresponding to the target number of reserved special figures and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Next, the second-half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process ends. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of suspensions, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter fluctuation (the type of reach (including no reach)) and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the rate of occurrence of reach changes according to the number of holds only in the case of misses (the rate of occurrence of reach decreases when the number of holds is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting processing]
Next, details of the above-described special figure suspension information determination processing, special figure 1 change start processing, and change pattern setting processing (steps A174, A326, A346) in the special figure 2 change start will be described. The change pattern is a first half change pattern that is a change mode from the start of the special figure change display game to the reach state, and a second half change pattern that is a change mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure change display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A471), and the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step A471). A472), and loads and prepares the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half change group table is different between the hit and non-hit types. Specifically, the size for hitting is 1 byte size, and the size for hitting is 2 byte size. Since the hit rate is lower than the hit rate, even one byte is sufficient, so that the hit is one byte in size from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hit, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the occurrence rate of outliers is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and the appearance of outliers has a 2-byte size in order to produce more various effects.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a miss (step A474). Move on to processing. If it is not a loss (step A474; N), a distribution process (step A476) is performed, and the flow shifts to the process of step A477.

  Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1), Prepare (step A478). Then, a distribution process (step A479) is performed, a second-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and saved in the second-half variation number area (step A480). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared. (Step A484). Thereafter, a distribution process (step A485) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, saved in the first variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 66 shows the distribution process (steps A476, A479, and A485) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The distribution process is based on the variation pattern random number 1 and selects the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table, or based on the variation pattern random number 2 and selects the second half variation selection table from the second half variation selection table. In the second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table based on the variation pattern random number 3. is there.

  In this distribution process, first, the first data of the target selection table (the second half variation selection table prepared in step A472, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A477, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A483) Is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (step A2201). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number). In the case of a selection table which does not need to be sorted, the sorting value “0”, that is, a code without sorting is specified at the top.

If the data at the head of the target selection table (the second-half variation group table, the second-half variation selection table, or the first-half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data corresponding to the distribution result is displayed. The address is updated (step A2207), and the distribution process ends.
On the other hand, if the data at the head of the target selection table (the second-half fluctuation group table, the second-half fluctuation selection table, or the first-half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (step A2202; N), the target selection table (the second-half fluctuation group table) Or the first half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table) (step A2203).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A2203 from the random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A473, A478, and A484. Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205). If the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203, and the subsequent processing is performed. Perform processing.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (the second-half variation group table, the second-half variation selection table, or the first-half variation selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and then the determination value is determined in the previous step A2205. A new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random value (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205).
The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). As a result, at least one second-half change selection table, second-half change pattern (second-half change number), and first-half change pattern (first-half change pattern) defined in the target selection table (the second-half change group table, the second-half change selection table, and the first-half change selection table) One of the second-half variation selection table, the second-half variation pattern (the second-half variation number), and the first-half variation pattern (the first-half variation number) are selected from among the (variation numbers).
If it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2205; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A2207), and the distribution process ends. I do.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 67 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a second-half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In the two-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the first data of the selection table (the second-half fluctuation group table prepared in step A472) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (step A2301). Here, the second half variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half variation selection table, but defines only the second half variation selection table in which the second half variation pattern is “no reach”. In a fluctuation group table (for example, some fluctuation group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, and therefore, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top. .

If the first data of the selection table (second half-change group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307) and 2 bytes The distribution processing ends.
On the other hand, if the data at the head of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), one distribution value specified first in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is obtained. (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random number value (the value of the variation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A473 (step A2304), and the calculated new random number is calculated. It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than “0” (step A2305). If the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the processing shifts to the processing of step A2303, and Perform processing.
That is, a distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and thereafter, the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305 to obtain a new distribution value. A random number value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2305).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). As a result, any one of the second-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one second-half variation selection table defined in the selection table (the second-half variation group table).
If it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2305; Y), the address is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the allocation result (step A2307), and the 2-byte allocation processing is performed. To end.
The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 66 and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 67 are basically the same, but the size of the random number used for the distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes. Therefore, the program instructions for calculation are different.

[Change start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting processing (steps A327 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in the change start information setting processing, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A491). Next, a first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is obtained (step A493). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (step A494), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (step A495).

  Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A500). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A504). Further, the change order flag storage area is shifted (step A505), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A506), and the change start information setting processing ends.

  Through the above processing, information relating to the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that determines various random numbers stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of storages to be started (reserved number), a decoration special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. There are a variation command including information on a pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of a stop time. Commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the changing symbol determination flag is prepared (step A601), and an effect command setting process (step A602) is performed. Next, a display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern number is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. When the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 2000 ms. If the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 2000 ms is set as the display time. That is, the game control device 100 forms a stop time setting unit that sets a stop time for displaying a stop result mode of the variable display game.

  Then, "2" related to the special figure displaying process is set as the process number (step A605), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606). Further, a signal related to the end of the change of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and a signal related to the end of the change of the special figure 2 (eg, the special symbol 2) Save the changing signal to OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A608), and store the control number in the external information terminal according to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for output in the symbol determination number signal control timer area in the control timer initial value. (For example, 256 ms) (step A609). After that, as a control information of the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display unit 51, a stop flag related to a change stop on the special figure 1 display unit 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step A610). ), As a control information for the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611), the special figure changing process ends.

[Processing during special map display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM A process of clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing are loaded. (Step A703), a process of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is determined that the big hit is a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit (the special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure variable display game is started. (For example, turning on the condition device operating signal, turning on the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, turning on the special symbol 2 hit signal) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 at step A705, if it is determined that the big hit is not a big hit (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706), and the big hit is determined (step A706). If it is determined to be A706; Y), a test signal (for example, a signal during operation of the condition device is turned ON, a signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is turned ON; The signal per special symbol (ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and processing for setting the round number upper limit table (step A709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. (Step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command relating to information for setting the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A716). A717) is performed.

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON when the big hit with a payout (the big win opening information is other than the big win opening information 1 (4R sure change (probability))), and the big hit with no payout (big win opening) When the opening information is the special winning opening information 1 (4R probability change (probability)), it is ON if a big hit occurs during the time saving state, and OFF otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the hit is a big hit with a payout, and is OFF when the hit is a big hit without a payout.

  After that, the special winning opening opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning as a result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. It is set (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special map when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared (step A722), and the special winning opening corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared. The flag outside the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the mouth unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step A723). Then, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the processing during the special figure display is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in one of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game. A special game state generating means for generating a state is provided.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the time reduction fluctuation number updating process (step A726), the effect mode information check process regarding the effect mode setting (step A727) ) To determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure change display game is the high probability state (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in the high probability state (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step A729), and the production command setting is performed. The processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the flow shifts to a process of step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in the high probability state (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variable display game is the high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is determined by the game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the user aware.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Thereafter, a small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display middle processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the time reduction variation number update process (step A735), the effect mode information check process regarding the effect mode setting (step A735) A736), the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the production mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether the production remaining rotation speed matches the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A738). It should be noted that the switching preparation remaining rotation speed may be a different value (rotation speed) in all of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value in any of the plurality of effect modes. (The number of rotations) or the same value (the number of rotations) in all the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step A738 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A738; N), special figure ordinary process shift setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed and special figure display is performed. The middle processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A738 that the production remaining rotation speed matches the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command setting is performed. After performing the processing (step A740), the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the processing during special figure display is ended. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing a prefetch effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is effected across modes. Can be avoided.

[Time reduction fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time reduction change frequency update processing (steps A726 and A735) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, in the time reduction change frequency update process, first, it is determined whether the special figure is in the high probability state (in the high probability state) (step A751). If the special figure high probability is in progress (step A751; Y), the time reduction variation count update process ends. If it is not during the special figure high probability (step A751; N), it is determined whether or not the time is being saved (step A752). If the time is not reduced (step A752; N), the time reduction change frequency update process ends. If the time reduction is in progress (step A752; Y), the number of times of time shortening change is updated by -1 (step A753), and it is determined whether the number of times of time shortening change becomes “0” (step A754).

  If the number of times of time shortening change is not “0” (step A754; N), the time shortening change number updating process is ended. When the number of times of the time shortening change becomes “0” (step A754; Y), a signal relating to the end of the time saving (for example, two big hits are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area. Next, a signal relating to the end of the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is stored in the test signal output data area. Save.

  Next, the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A757), the ordinary figure low probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A758), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The low probability & no time saving flag is saved (step A759). Next, a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and the display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) during right-handing is set. In order to turn off the light, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A761), and the time reduction fluctuation number update process ends.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, details of the effect mode information check processing (steps A727 and A736) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the effect mode information check processing, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a code without update (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a code without update (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check processing ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed in accordance with the number of executed special figure change display games, and for example, the effect mode in which the high probability state continues until the next big hit is selected. .

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation speed, which is the number of times the special figure variable display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). Then, it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed has become “0” (step A773). If the effect remaining rotation speed is not “0” (step A773; N), the effect mode information check processing ends. Further, when the effect remaining rotation speed becomes “0” (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step A774). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is obtained (step A775).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, and the effect remaining rotational speed in the RWM is acquired. It saves in the area (step A677), acquires the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A678). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the state of the probability has not changed, the effect mode information check processing ends.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A782). An effect command setting process (step A782) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A783), and effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared (step A785), and effect command setting processing (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787). If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process ends. If the mode is a left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), an effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information check process ends. I do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that gives a notice of switching before the specified number of revolutions of the effect mode switching. By managing the effect modes in the game control device 100 in this way, for example, control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific effect mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, a processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set to “3” (step A791), and the processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. The number is saved (step A792).

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, one big hit signal ON (output with big hit + small hit), four big hit signals ON (output with big hit)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 is turned off). The symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, the ordinary figure changes only the probability state, so that the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), and the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the ordinary figure game mode flag is set. The low probability flag is saved in the area (step A797).

  Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high-probability notification flag area is used to turn off the game state display LED (third game state display unit) provided on the game board 30 for displaying the high probability state. Is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in a power failure restoration transmission command area for saving a command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A801), and a special figure variation display that can be executed in a time-saving state. The time reduction fluctuation number area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are completed, and the state becomes the normal state and the normal state.

  Thereafter, the effect mode number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). . Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the second game state display unit) is turned on. In order to cause this, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is terminated. As a result, the information of the effect mode is temporarily cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 (step A734) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 75, in the small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1, first, “7” related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step A811), and the processing number is set to the special figure game processing. The data is saved in the number area (step A812).

  Next, a small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned on (big hit + small hit is output) )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A814), and a signal related to the start of the small hitting game (for example, a special symbol 1 small hitting signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Next, the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A816), and the illegal monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A817).
Next, a signal related to the right-handing instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818), and the display LED during right-handing (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the process of the fanfare / interval, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902). And effect command setting processing (step A903).

Thereafter, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is obtained (step A905). It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (step A906).
If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the special winning game opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) for the short opening (second opening mode) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then (step A907), the special winning opening opening process shift setting process (step A909) is performed, and the fanfare / interval process ends.
If the number of rounds is not greater than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the special winning game opening timer (for example, 29 seconds) for the long opening (first opening mode) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. The game is saved (step A908), a special winning opening opening process shift setting process (step A909) is performed, and the fanfare / interval process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, 16R probability change A (all open long), 16R probability change B (1-4R open long, 5-16R open short), 16R normal A (all open long), 16R normal B (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), 4R certain change (all short open) are set. The probability change is a big hit in which the probability state after the end of the special game state is a high probability state, and the normal state is a big hit in which the probability state after the end of the special game state is a low probability state. Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, the 16R certain variation A data and the open switching determination value “0”, the 16R certain variation B data and the open switching determination value “4”, the 16R normal A data and the open switching determination value “0”, The 16R normal B data and the open switching determination value “4” are stored in association with each other, and the 4R sure change data and the open switching determination value “0”. When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is performed such that the opening operation is long, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is short opening.

(Grand prize opening opening process transition setting process)
FIG. 77 shows the processing shift setting processing during opening of the special winning opening in the above-described processing during the fanfare / interval (step A909). In the special winning opening processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the special winning opening processing (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A911). Step A912). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening start of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. The information in the winning opening count area is cleared (step A914). Then, the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the processing setting setting for opening the special winning opening is ended.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
Next, the details of the special winning opening processing (step A12) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the special winning opening process, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM to determine the current round. It is determined whether it is the last round (step A1001). If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003). It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).
If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005). An interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1007), effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, and a special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening is being opened. The process ends.

  If the number of rounds is not greater than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1004). A1006), an interval command is prepared (step A1007), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening process is ended. I do.

  On the other hand, if it is the last round (step A1001; Y), the final ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the special game state ends. An ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the time is prepared (step A1009), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, and a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is performed. The processing during opening of the special winning opening ends.

(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing transition setting processing)
FIG. 79 shows the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) in the above-described special winning opening processing. In the special winning port remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the special winning port remaining ball processing (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the opening / closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38, off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the special winning opening remains. The ball processing shift setting processing ends.

(Grand Winner Remaining Ball Processing)
Next, the details of the special winning port remaining ball processing (step A13) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 80, in the special winning port remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area to determine the current round. It is determined whether it is the last round (step A1101).

If the current round in the special gaming state is not the last round (step A1101; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is obtained. Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the special game state is greater than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1105). If the number of rounds is greater than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109 is performed. Move to the processing of. If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening information is a value of a rank down effect system (step A1106).

  Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect that notifies that a subsequent round will be a short open round. More specifically, as the jackpot pattern, 16R probability change A (all open long), 16R probability change B (1-4R open long, 5-16R short open), 16R normal A (all open long), 16R normal B (all open long) When any one of (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open) is selected, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round, The round continuation notification effect is executed. If the selected big hit pattern is 16R probability change A or 16R normal B (all long open), it is notified that the long open will continue in the round continuation notification effect, and the large winning opening will be long open even in the 5R and subsequent rounds. It is opened with. Also, if the selected big hit pattern is 16R probability change B or 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), the rank down effect is performed in the round continuation notification effect and short open. This informs the player that the special winning opening will be opened shortly in the 5R and subsequent rounds.

If the special winning opening information is not the value of the rank down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the special winning opening information is a value of a rank down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a value of a special effect round (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, an interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step A1107). A1108), the process proceeds to the process of step A1109. Note that the number of special rounds is not limited to one, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

  Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed to perform the special winning opening remaining ball processing. To end.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the last round (step A1101; Y), a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1101). A1111), an ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening opening information, and the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1112), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. Save (step A1113). After that, the big hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball processing ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 81 shows the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described winning winning port remaining ball process. In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, a processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set to “3” (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A112). A1122).
Next, a signal (for example, the signal during the operation of the special electric accessory 1 is turned off) relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123), and the fanfare / interval The mid-process shift setting process 2 ends.

[Big hit end process shift setting process]
FIG. 82 shows the jackpot end process shift setting process (step A1114) in the above-mentioned winning winning port remaining ball process. In the big hit end processing shift setting processing, first, "6" is set as the processing number related to the big hit end processing (step A1131), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1132). After that, a signal (for example, the signal during the operation of the special electric auditors character 1 OFF) relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

  Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and the information of the round number area storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1135). ), The information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1136). Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step A1137), and the opening information area for the special winning opening storing the flag for determining the opening information of the special winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end processing shift setting processing ends.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the big hit end processing (step A14) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in the big hit ending process, first, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of the special result which has triggered the execution of the current special game state is set to a high probability after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high-probability data set in the state (step A1201).

  If the data is not high probability data (step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A1202). If the data is high probability data (step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (step A1203). ), A probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A1204), and a command setting process (step A1205) is performed.

  Next, as processing for saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1206). Then, referring to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1207). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1208), and the next mode transition to the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is obtained. Information is obtained and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1209).

  Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A1210), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A1211), and a command setting process (step A1212) is performed. Then, the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 is performed (step A1213), and the big hit end process ends.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 84 shows the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the above big hit end process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the start of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal relating to the start of the time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

  Next, the general figure high probability & general power support flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (step A1223), and the special figure low probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1224). After that, the probability information command (time saving) is saved in the power transmission restoration transmission command area (step A1225), the time shortening change frequency initial value (for example, 100) is saved in the time shortening change frequency area (step A1226), and the big hit ends. The setting process 1 ends.

  By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variable display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. In addition, by setting the initial value (for example, 100) of the number of time saving changes in the number of time saving changes area, the time saving state is ended by executing the special figure change display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 85 shows the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above big hit end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231), and a signal relating to the start of the high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

  Next, the general figure high probability & general power support flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (step A1233), and the special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1234). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power transmission restoration transmission command area (step A1235), the time reduction fluctuation frequency area is cleared (step A1236), and the big hit end setting processing 2 ends. With the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variable display game becomes the high probability state and the time saving state is reached until the next special result mode is derived.

  That is, the specific game state in which the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (time saving state) in which the period during which the normal variable prize device 37 is opened is extended for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. It constitutes state generation control means.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 2]
FIG. 86 shows the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-described big hit end process. In the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2, first, “0” is set as the processing number relating to the special figure ordinary processing (step A1241), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1242). .

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, turning off one signal of the jackpot, turning off three signals of the jackpot, and turning off four signals of the jackpot) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243), and a signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, Then, the condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag retreat area is cleared (step A1248), the irregularity monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure ordinary processing transition setting processing 2 is performed. To end.

[Processing during small hit fanfare]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 87A, in the small hit fanfare middle processing, a small hit middle processing shift setting processing (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hit middle processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit mid-flight processing transition setting processing (step A1301) in the small hit fan fare mid-process will be described. As shown in FIG. 87 (b), in the small hit middle process shift setting process, first, “8” relating to the small hit middle process is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is assigned to the special figure game process. The data is saved in the number area (step A1312).

Next, the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hitting game is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal relating to the start of the small hitting operation (for example, special electric accessory 1) The operation signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the opening / closing member 990 of the special fluctuation winning device 38, ON data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area for storing the winning number to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1316), and the small hitting operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hitting medium control pointer area. (Step A1317), the small hit middle processing shift setting processing ends.

[Small hit processing]
Next, the details of the small hitting processing (step A16) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 88, in the small hitting process, first, the value of the small hitting control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and whether the loaded value is equal to or larger than the small hitting operation end value (for example, “6”). Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (Step A1402; N), the small hit control pointer is updated by +1 (Step A1403), and the small hit operation transition setting process (Step A1404) is performed. The hit processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag indicates that the special figure high probability It is determined whether or not the flag is related (step A1406). In this way, it is determined whether the small hit occurs during the special figure high probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the employee is in the time saving state.
If the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the small hit remaining sphere processing shift setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing ends. If the loaded flag is not a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), a command for a small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and effect command setting processing (step A1408) is performed. The small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing ends.

[Small hit operation shift setting process]
Next, details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) in the small hit middle process will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in the small hit operation transition setting process, a branch process (step A1411) is performed according to the control pointer (the small hit control pointer).

If the control pointer is "0", "2", or "4" in step A1411, the wait time (for example, 1500 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412). The OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation shift setting processing ends.
If the control pointer is "1", "3", or "5" in step A1411, the special winning opening time (for example, 200 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A1414), the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1415), and the small hit operation shift setting processing ends.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fan fare time of 300 msec, the opening of 200 msec and the closing of 1500 msec are alternately performed. Be updated.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 ms release (that is, at the time of switching from the first 200 ms release to the first 1500 ms close), the small hit control pointer is updated to “0”, and 1 At the end of the first 1500 ms closing (that is, at the time of switching from the first 1500 ms closing to the second 200 ms opening), the small hit control pointer is updated to “1”, and the second 200 ms opening is performed. At the end, the small hit control pointer is updated to “2”, at the end of the second 1500 ms closing, the small hit control pointer is updated to “3”, and at the end of the third 200 ms opening, the small hit control The pointer is updated to "4", and the small hit control pointer is updated to "5" at the end of the third 1500 msec closing. At the end of the fourth 200 ms release, the small hit control pointer is updated to "6", and after the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 ms and the subsequent small hit ending time of 100 ms, the small hit is reached. The state ends. Therefore, after the fourth opening of 200 ms, the shutter is closed for 2000 ms, so that the apparent ending time is 2000 ms.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining sphere processing shift setting processing (step A1409) in the small hit medium processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, in the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing, first, “9” relating to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is set to the special figure game processing number. The data is saved in the area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1424). The remaining ball processing transfer setting processing ends.

[Small hit ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), in the small hit remaining ball processing, a small hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end processing shift setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the small hit end processing shift setting processing, first, "10" relating to the small hit end processing is set as the processing number (step A1511), and the processing number is set to the special figure game processing. The data is saved in the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, the information in the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step A1515), the information in the small hit control pointer area is cleared (for example, cleared to 0) (step A1516), and the small hit end processing transition setting processing ends. .

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing (step A18) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 92, in the small hit ending process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1601). Step A1602).
If the loaded flag is not the flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect mode set at the start of the change (when the stop symbol is set). The address of the table corresponding to the migration information is obtained (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is obtained, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be shifted is obtained, and the effect remaining rotation speed in the RAM. It saves in the area (step A1606), acquires the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610). An effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.
Next, an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared (step A1614), and effect command setting processing (step A1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616). If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and after effect command setting processing (step A1618) is performed, the processing proceeds to step A1619. Transition.

Then, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure time saving (during the time saving state) (step A1620).
If the loaded flag is a flag relating to special figure time saving (Y in step A1620), special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit ending processing ends.
If the loaded flag is not the flag for special figure time saving (step A1620; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1620). A1621), the number of the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area to turn off the right-displayed LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) (step A1622), The process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end process ends.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) in the small hit end process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 93, in the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing, first, “0” related to the special figure ordinary processing is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is set in the special figure game processing number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, turning off one big hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634).
Next, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information in the special figure game mode flag retreat area is cleared (step A1637).
Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 is ended.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 94, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written into the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process ends.
The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as “command setting process”.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 95 shows a symbol variation control process (steps A20 and A22) in the above-described special figure game process, and a symbol variation control process (step B15) in the later-described general figure game process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (ordinary symbol) and setting display data of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

  In the symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag for the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the ordinary figure) is changing (step A2101). . In the case of the present embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, and the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14). (For stop) and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined.

If the changing flag for the symbol to be controlled is changing (step A2102; Y), a symbol display table (for changing) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2103). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, the blink control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the updated blink control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blink control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control processing ends.

  If the updated flashing control timer is “0” (step A2105; Y), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (step A2106), and the variable symbol number of the control target is set. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control processing ends.

On the other hand, when the in-flight flag related to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step A2110), the obtained display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control processing ends.

  As the blinking control timer initial value saved in step A2106, a value defined in a fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as an initial value of the blinking control timer in the fluctuation control table of the first special figure (first special figure fluctuation display game). ), A value corresponding to 104 ms is defined as an initial value of the blinking control timer, and a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer in the variation control table of the ordinary figure (universal variation display game). Have been. The initial value of the blink control timer is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the variable symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number reaches the upper limit value of the variable symbol number by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 (variable symbol number upper limit judgment value -1). ) Are sequentially updated. In steps A2108 and A2111, a setting is made to acquire and display the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number, and update (change) the number of illumination patterns equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. Is performed, a cycle of display is repeatedly performed.

  Here, 8 is defined as the variable symbol number upper limit determination value in the variable control table of the first special figure (first special figure variable display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-7. Therefore, the special figure 1 changing display, which is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the first special figure changing display game, goes around once by updating the lighting pattern eight times. Further, 2 is defined as the variable symbol number upper limit determination value in the variable control table of the second special figure (second special figure variable display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated with 0 and 1 alternately. Therefore, the special figure 2 changing display, which is repeatedly displayed during the changing display of the second special figure changing display game, goes around once by updating the lighting pattern twice. Further, 4 is defined as the variable symbol number upper limit determination value in the variable control table of the general symbol (general symbol variable display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated in the range of 0 to 3. Therefore, the display during the change in the general figure, which is repeatedly displayed during the change display of the general-floor change display game, makes one cycle by updating the lighting pattern four times.

  By defining the blink control timer initial value and the variable symbol number upper limit value in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed in this way, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are repeated. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public figure game processing]
Next, details of the general-purpose game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the general-figure game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, control of the entire processing relating to the general-figure change display game, setting of the general-figure display, and the like are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 96, in the general game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general power winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the ordinary game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the ordinary game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become “0” (step B4).

  If the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time has elapsed or the time has already elapsed, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number. A process (step B5) of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table in a register is performed, and a process (step B6) of obtaining a branch destination address of a process corresponding to a general-purpose game process number using the table is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the general game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, if the general-figure game processing number is “0”, the start of the fluctuation of the general-figure fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the fluctuation start and the effect of the general-figure fluctuation display game are set. A general drawing routine (step B8) for setting information necessary for performing the processing is performed.
If the general-figure game process number is “1” in step B7, the general-figure change processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the general-figure display processing is performed.

Also, in step B7, if the general-figure game processing number is “2”, if the result of the general-figure change display game is a hit, setting of the general power release time according to whether or not the time saving state is in effect In addition, a normal map display process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map hit process is performed.
If the general game processing number is "3" at the step B7, the general game process is continued or the information necessary for performing the general electric ball processing is set. The processing (step B11) is performed.

If the general-purpose game processing number is "4" in step B7, the general-purpose remaining sphere process (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the general-purpose end process is performed.
If the general-purpose game process number is "5" at step B7, a general-purpose hit end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the general-purpose normal process is performed.

Then, after preparing a general symbol variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display (step B14), a symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display (step B15). ) To end the ordinary map game process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not “0” (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step B14, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 97, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether the game state is right-handed (for example, during a large hit, during a small hit, during special figure time reduction (under normal power support)). (Step B102).
When the game state is a right-handed game state (step B102; Y), the number of general-purpose reservations is acquired, and it is determined whether the number of general-purpose reservations is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”) (step B105). If the game mode is not a right-handed gaming state (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), and after effect command setting processing (step B104), the number of ordinary drawing reservations is acquired. It is determined whether the number of ordinary drawing reservations is less than the upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step B105).

  If the number of reserved general drawing is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved general drawing is updated by +1 (step B106), and the address of the hit random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved general drawing is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the winning random number is extracted, saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storing area of the RWM (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is performed. To end.

  If it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or if it is determined in step B105 that the number of ordinary drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N), The gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the ordinary winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, in the normal winning switch monitoring process, first, during the normal winning, that is, the normal changing display game is in a hit state, and the normal changing winning device 37 is performing a predetermined number of opening operations. It is determined whether there is (Step B201). Then, when the vehicle is in the normal position (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). Is determined, the count value of the ordinary power counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated ordinary power counter is equal to or more than an upper limit value (for example, “6”) (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, the value of the operation end (for example, “4”) is hit by hitting the control pointer area during the ordinary drawing, and the value of the operation end is saved (step B205), the ordinary game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the ordinary power winning switch monitoring process is performed. finish. In other words, when there is a general winning of a prize equal to or more than the upper limit value in the hit state of the ordinary figure, the hit state of the ordinary figure is terminated at that time.

  Also, when it is determined in step B201 that the vehicle is not in the normal position (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. If it is determined that the ordinary power count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step B204; N), the ordinary power winning switch monitoring process ends.

(Normal map everyday processing)
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B8) in the aforementioned ordinary figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the ordinary figure ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the number of ordinary figure reservations is “0” (step B301), and when the number of ordinary figure reservations is “0” (step B201; Y). ) Performs the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B321), and ends the ordinary figure ordinary processing. If the number of reserved symbols is not "0" (step B301; N), random numbers are loaded from the winning random number storage area of RWM (for reserved number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) ( (Step B302), the winning random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) are cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure change display game is normal. It is determined whether the figure is in the high figure high probability higher than the probability (ie, the small figure low probability), that is, in the time saving state (step B304).

If it is not during the high figure probabilities (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the low figure probabilities is set (step B305), and if the high figure probabilities are high (step B304). ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of high probability of ordinary figure (step B306).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307). If the value of the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307; N), the value of the hit random number is determined in step B305 or B306. It is determined whether it is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B308 (step B308).

If the value of the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit judgment value (step B307; Y) or if the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), the hit flag is set. Loss information is saved in the area (Step B309), a loss stop symbol number is set (Step B310), and the loss symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (Step B311), and the stop symbol number is stopped. The image is saved in the symbol area (step B315).
On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B312), and the hit loaded in step B302. The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B313), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B314), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol. Save to the area (step B315).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of a hit at the time of low probability of public figure is 0/251, the probability of a hit at the time of high probability of public figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is “251”, and the lower probability lower limit judgment value is “251” and the high probability lower limit determination value are “1”.
Therefore, at the time of the low probability of the normal figure, the value is shifted when the value of the hit random number is all “0” to “250”.
In addition, at the time of high probability of the normal figure, a case where the value of the hit random number is any one of “1” to “250” is a hit, and a case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is a miss.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B317), the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B318), and the number of ordinary drawing reservations is updated by -1 (step B319). In other words, the process of moving up the ranks of the reserved number of ordinary drawings 2 to 4 that are suspended after the reserved number of ordinary figure 1 by one with the execution of the public figure change display game relating to the oldest reserved number of ordinary figure 1 I do. By this processing, the value for the number of ordinary figure reservations 2 to the number of ordinary figure reservations 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is moved from the number 1 for ordinary figure retention to the number 3 for ordinary figure retention in the random number storage area per ordinary figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number 4 of ordinary figure reservation in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the number of ordinary figure reservation is decremented by one.
Then, the normal figure changing process is set (step B320), and the normal figure ordinary processing is ended.

[Normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 1]
FIG. 100 shows the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B321) in the ordinary figure ordinary processing described above, and the ordinary figure ordinary processing transition setting processing 1 (step B508) in the ordinary figure displaying processing described later. . In the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1, first, “0” is set as the processing number for shifting to the ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B331), and the processing number is saved in the ordinary figure game processing number area (step B331). B332). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag region for normal use (step B333), and the general-purpose normal process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Process shift setting process during normal fluctuation]
FIG. 101 shows the process of setting a transition to a normal figure changing process (step B320) in the normal time normal processing described above. In the normal figure change processing transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure change processing (step B341), and the processing number is saved in the general figure game processing number area (step B341). Step B342).
Thereafter, the normal figure fluctuation time (for example, 500 ms; in the case of the present embodiment, the general figure fluctuation time is common to the general figure low probability state and the general figure high probability state) in the general figure game processing timer area. Save (step B343), save a signal relating to the start of the normal figure change display game (for example, turn on the normal symbol 1 changing signal) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and change the normal figure change display game. The in-flight flag indicating that the vehicle is in the middle is saved in the normal-floor fluctuation control flag area (step B345).
Then, the initial value of the blink control timer (here, 52 ms), which is the initial value of the blink cycle timer of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blink control timer area (step B346), and the ordinary figure change process transition setting processing is performed. To end.

[Processing during normal map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general figure changing process (step B9) in the general figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), in the normal figure change processing, the normal figure display process transition setting processing (step B401) is performed.

[Transfer setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-figure display process transition setting process (step B401) in the above-described general-figure change process will be described. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), in the process of setting the process to be in the normal figure display, first, the process number is set to “2” as the setting process for shifting to the process of the normal figure display (step B411). The number is saved in the general game processing number area (step B412). After that, the general-figure display time (for example, 600 ms), which is the display time of the result of the general-figure display game on the general-figure display device, is saved in the general-figure game processing timer area (step B413), and a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the general-figure (For example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and a stop flag indicating that the general figure fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the general figure fluctuation control flag area. Then (step B415), the routine-migration-during-display process shift setting process ends.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general figure display processing (step B10) in the above general figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, in the process of displaying a normal figure, first, the hit flag (hit information or out-of-position information) set in the normal process of the normal figure is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not the hit information (step B503; N), the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B508) for shifting to the ordinary figure ordinary processing is performed, and the ordinary figure displaying processing ends.
On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), a hitting process setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer (for example, “0”) corresponding to the ordinary symbol stop symbol information is set. , "2", or "4") and saves it in the control pointer area during the ordinary drawing (step B505). Next, a general power release time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol information is obtained and saved in the general symbol game processing timer area (step B506). After that, the normal-drawing-per-middle processing shift setting processing (step B211) is performed, and the normal-drawing-middle-display processing is ended.

[Middle-time process shift setting process]
FIG. 104 shows the process for setting transition to the middle of per-figure process (step B507) in the above-mentioned process for displaying a common figure. In this process, the process number is set to "3" (step B511), and the process number is saved in the general game process number area. (Step B512). After that, a signal related to the hit of the normal figure change display game (for example, the normal signal per normal symbol is ON) and a signal related to the start of the normal power operation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 active signal is turned ON) are output as test signal output data. The data is saved in the area (step B513), and the ON data is saved in the area of the ordinary solenoid output data to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary solenoid (step B514).

  Further, the information of the general telephone count number area storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), and the general number winning device to the normal variable winning device 37 during the illegal monitoring period of the general telephone is stored. The information of the illegal winning number area is cleared (step B516). Then, the flag (out-of-fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is saved in the ordinary telephone fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the normal-middle-per-middle processing shift setting process ends I do.

[Medium processing per drawing]
Next, a detailed description will be given of the during-normal-drawing process (step B11) in the above-described general-purpose game processing. As shown in FIG. 105, in the per-figure-period processing, first, the per-figure-period control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded per-figure-period control pointer is equal to or larger than the upper limit value. Is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer during normal operation is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer during normal operation is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal power operation transition setting process (step B604) is performed. Then, the middle processing for normal drawing ends.
On the other hand, when the value of the control pointer during normal operation is not less than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the process of updating the control pointer area during normal operation in step B603 by +1 is not performed, and the normal power operation transition is performed. The setting process (step B604) is performed, and the process for hitting the ordinary figure ends.

(Privilege operation transition setting process)
FIG. 106 shows a normal power operation shift setting process (step B604) in the above-described normal time per hit process. The normal power operation shift setting process is a process of controlling the drive of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (control pointer during normal time). Like that. In the normal power operation shift setting process, first, a branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B611).

  If the value of the control pointer is "0" or "2", the flow proceeds to step B612 to control the closing of the normal variable prize device 37 after the normal variable prize device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is closed. Is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B612), and in order to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c, off data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B613), and the general-purpose operation transition setting is performed. The process ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B614 to control the opening of the normal variable prize device 37. The general power release time, which is the release time, is saved in the general game processing timer area (step B614), and ON data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn on the general solenoid 37c (step B615). The normal power operation transfer setting process ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B616 to end the opening control of the ordinary variable prize device 37 and perform the ordinary electric sphere processing. Is set (step B616). Then, the processing number is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area (step B617), and the general electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B619). After that, in order to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c, the OFF data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B619), and the general-purpose operation shift setting process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, 200 ms as the wait time in step B612, 1700 ms as the open time for ordinary power in step B614, and 600 ms as the processing time for the ordinary electric sphere in step B618 are saved. .
Further, when the normal symbol stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "4" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display process shown in FIG. In step B506, “500 ms” is acquired as the ordinary power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 ms elapses, the ordinary power release time is "500 ms", so that the ordinary power (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is opened for 500 milliseconds, and thereafter, the control pointer during the ordinary figure is set to "4". Therefore, the normal electric power remaining sphere processing time of 600 ms is set.
If the normal symbol stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "2" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display process shown in FIG. In step B506, “1700 ms” is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 ms elapses, the ordinary power release time is "1700 msec", so that the ordinary power is released for 1700 msec. The time is set, and then the control signal is updated to "3" during the normal operation, so that the power is released for 1700 msec. Then, the control control is updated to "4" for 600 msec. The normal electricity remaining sphere processing time is set.
When the normal symbol stop symbol is "hit symbol 3", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display process shown in FIG. In step B506, “1700 ms” is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 ms elapses, the ordinary power release time is "1700 msec", so that the ordinary power is released for 1700 msec, and thereafter, since the control pointer is "0" per ordinary figure, the 200 msec wait time is set. The time is set, and then the control signal is updated to “1” during the normal operation, so that the public power is released for 1700 ms. Then, the control pointer during the normal operation is updated to “2” for 200 ms. The wait time is set, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "3" so that the public power is released for 1700 ms, and then the general control pointer is updated to "4" for 600 ms. Is set.

(Puden residual sphere treatment)
Next, the details of the ordinary power remaining sphere process (step B12) in the ordinary game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), in the ordinary-power remaining sphere process, an ordinary-game-period end process transition setting process (step B701) is performed.

[Private figure end processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing shift setting processing (step B701) in the above-described general electric remaining sphere processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 107 (b), in the general figure end processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number “5” relating to the general figure end processing is set (step B711), and the processing number is set to the general figure game. The data is saved in the processing number area (step B712).

  Thereafter, the general figure ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal relating to the end of the operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the ordinary power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the control pointer area during the normal time per hit figure is cleared (step B716), and the normal time per hit end processing shift setting processing ends.

[End processing per map]
Next, the details of the per-figure-per-end processing (step B13) in the above-mentioned perforated figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), in the general figure end processing, the general figure normal processing shift setting processing 2 (step B801) is performed.

[Normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2 (step B801) in the ordinary figure end processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), in the normal figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2, first, the processing number “0” related to the general figure ordinary processing is set (step B811), and the processing number is set to the general figure game processing. The data is saved in the number area (step B812).

  After that, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal fluctuation display game (for example, the normal signal per normal symbol is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the illegal fluctuation monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (the flag during the illegal monitoring period) is saved in the flag area for monitoring the illegal operation of the ordinary telephone (step B814), and the ordinary drawing shift setting process 2 ends.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display, the special figure 2 hold display, the general figure hold display, the first game state display section, the second game state display section, and the round display provided on the collective display device 50 are provided. Settings related to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit are performed.

As shown in FIG. 109, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blink control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether or not the output ON timing is based on whether a specific bit of the blink control timer is 1 or not. (Step S502). In this embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blink control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on, so that a blink period of 128 ms is created.
If it is the output ON timing (step S502; Y), the general figure reservation number display table 1 of the general figure reservation number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the general figure reservation display is specified is set. (Step S503) If it is not the output ON timing (Step S502; N), the ordinary figure reservation number display table 2 is set (Step S504).
Then, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved general-use drawings is acquired from the set number-of-regular-use reservation display table, and is saved in the segment area of the general-use pending display (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the number of ordinary figure reservations is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data is the same regardless of which ordinary figure reservation number display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506). If the output is on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number in which the display mode on the special figure 1 reservation display is specified is determined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step S507), and if it is not the output ON timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step S506; N). Step S508).
Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table, and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display (step S509).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the output is on (step S510). If the output is on (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 reservation number display in which the display mode on the special figure 2 reservation display is specified is determined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 reserved number display table 1 is set (step S511), and if it is not the output ON timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 reserved number display table 2 is set (step S510). S512).
Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is acquired from the set special figure 2 reservation number display table, and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 reservation display (step S513).
Further, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit is specified is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step S515). ).

Next, the game state display table 1 is set in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 which lights up when the time reduction state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time reduction state is defined (step S516), and the game state display number is set. Is obtained and saved in the segment area of the first game state display section (step S517). In the present embodiment, the first game state display section including one LED is configured to be turned off during normal times and turned on during special figure time reduction (during normal power support).
After that, a game state display table 2 is set, in which the display mode on the second game state display unit for notifying that a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game state is set (step S518). The display data corresponding to the state display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area of the second game state display section (step S519), and the segment LED editing process ends. In the present embodiment, the second game state display unit composed of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hit (left hit) and at the time of right hit (in the case of the present embodiment, during a big hit, during a small hit, and during general power support). ) Is configured to light up.

[Magnet fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the magnet illegal monitoring process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

  As shown in FIG. 110, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal. It is determined whether or not the magnetism has been detected (step S601). When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet irregularity monitoring timer that measures the period of detecting abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 (step S602), and the timer is updated. It is determined whether the time has elapsed (step S603). In the case of the present embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or more.

  If the timer of the magnet fraud monitoring timer has expired (step S603; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( (For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet improper notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the magnetic sensor 61 is not turned on (step S601; N), that is, if abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet illegal monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet illegal If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). Note that the minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet improper notification timer is “0” (step S610). When the timer for monitoring unauthorized access to the magnet has not expired (step S603; N), the process proceeds to step S609.

  Then, if the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the period of the fraudulent notification has ended or the fraud has been started from the beginning, If the notification has not been performed, a command for ending the magnet fraudulent notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613).

When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step S615), the magnet illegal monitoring process ends.
Here, "step S601; N" → "step S608" → "step S609" → "step S610; Y" → "step S611" → "step S612" → "step S613; Y" is a normal route.

(Panel radio fraud monitoring processing)
Next, the details of the board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

  As shown in FIG. 111, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether or not the panel radio wave sensor 62 is turned on, that is, a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

  Then, a command for informing the radio wave fraudulent information is prepared (step S703), and a fraudulent radio wave occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent radio wave flag (step S704). It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic irregularities, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, in the case of panel radio waves, the ON of the panel radio sensor 62 is detected once. At this point, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud time is -1 unless it is "0". Update (step S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is “0” (step S706).

  If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is “0” (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or the time has already expired and the period of the fraudulent notification has expired or the fraud has been detected from the beginning, If the notification has not been made, a command for ending the fraudulent radio wave notification is prepared (step S707), and a fraudulent radio wave release flag is prepared as a fraudulent radio wave flag (step S708). It is determined whether the value matches the value in the panel radio wave flag area (step S709).

If the prepared panel radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the panel radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the prepared panel radio wave illegal flag does not match the value of the panel radio wave illegal flag area (step S709; N), the prepared panel radio wave illegal flag is saved in the panel radio wave illegal flag area (step S710), and the production command A setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process ends.
Here, "step S701; N" → "step S705" → "step S706; Y" → "step S707" → "step S708" → "step S709; Y" is a normal route.

[External information editing processing]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (Step S105), the winning port switch / status monitoring process (Step S108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (Step S112), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (Step S113) Based on the information, a process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the external information editing process, first, when no glass frame opening error has occurred (step S801; N) and when no main frame opening error has occurred (step S802; N), Then, the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, if a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or if a body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the ON data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not “0”, −1 is updated ( Step S807). Note that the initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the RAM initial value when the RAM processing is started in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the security data ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810 is performed. Move to the processing of. If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S808; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already elapsed, the process of step S809 is not performed and the process of step S810 is performed. Transition.

  Then, when the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), when the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), In the case where the illegal operation of the telephone is occurring (step S813; Y), or in the case where the illegal operation of the special winning opening is occurring (step S814; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S814; Y). (Step S816), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (Step S817), and the process proceeds to Step S818. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, there is no occurrence of improper magnet (step S810; N), no occurrence of panel radio improperity (step S811; N), no occurrence of frame radio improperity (step S812; N), and no occurrence of general electric fraud. (Step S813; N) If the winning combination is not occurring (Step S814; N), the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (Step S815), and the process proceeds to Step S818. Move on to processing.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting port signal editing process (step S819) for editing a winning port winning signal is performed.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure change display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S820). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step S821).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S821; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already elapsed, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S822), the external information editing process ends.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S821; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S821). S823), ends the external information editing process.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, the main prize ball signal generated each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) is externally processed. This is the process of outputting to the device.

  As shown in FIG. 114, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, unless the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0”, −1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832). When the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of output of the main award ball signal is “0” (step S833).

If the main prize ball signal output count is not “0” (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by −1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area stores the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is determined by the time between the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal (for example, 128 ms) and the time of the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 ms). Of the ON state (for example, 128 msec). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process ends.
If the main award ball signal output count is “0” (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the main award ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is not “0” (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main award ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0”. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on interval (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step S836; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

In the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 each time the scheduled number of game balls to be paid becomes ten, and the number of game balls paid out from the payout control device 200 becomes ten. The main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of times of output of the main prize ball number signal by +1 (a subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every ten payout schedules (each time a payout command is transmitted), and updates ( The main prize ball signal is output for the set number of times of output.
In response to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually made, so that the plan and the result can be matched. It can respond to improper payment. Also, even if a prize is won during the jackpot, the payout is delayed due to lack of a ball or the like, and even if the payout is made after the end of the big hit, the hall con (hole computer) can be accurately determined by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (determined).

(Start port signal editing process)
Next, the details of the starting port signal editing process (step S819) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The starting port signal editing process is a process that is performed in common for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 115, in the opening signal editing process, first, unless the starting signal output control timer is “0”, −1 is updated (step S841). Note that the minimum value of the starting port signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842). If the value of the starting port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the number of starting port signal outputs is “0” (step S843).

If the starting port signal output count is not “0” (step S843; N), the starting port signal output count is updated by −1 (step S844), and the starting port signal output control timer is set in the starting port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The initial value of the start-up port signal output control timer is determined based on the on-state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off-state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start-up signal. This is the ON state time (for example, 128 msec). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the start-up port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the start-up port signal editing process ends.
If the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843; Y), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S843). S848), ends the start-up signal editing process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting port signal output control timer is not “0” (Step S842; N), it is determined whether or not the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON section (Step S846). Note that the start port signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0”. If the start port signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step S846; N), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( (Step S848) The start port signal editing process ends.

  Next, an effect in a game and control by the effect control device 300 for controlling the effect will be described. FIGS. 116 and 117 show an example of an effect in the special game state. Here, a case where a 16R certain-variable B big hit including a short opening has occurred is shown.

  After the jackpot result mode is derived in the special figure change display game, a fanfare effect corresponding to the jackpot type is performed as shown in FIG. 116 (a), and then the round game is started. As shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the display device 41, a round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, a symbol display 41b displaying a big hit symbol derived in the decorative special figure variation display game, a right-hand instruction for instructing right-hand. A display 41c and an acquired game ball number display 41d indicating the number of prize balls acquired by long opening are displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), when a game ball wins and wins a prize ball in the special variable prize winning device 38 in a long open round, the prize ball number is displayed as a prize ball number display 41e and Is added to the acquired game ball number display 41d. When the round ends and the interval comes, an interval effect is performed as shown in FIG. Here, since the next round is also a long opening, an interval effect for the long opening is performed.

  In addition, when the round game progresses and the mode transition selection round in which the notification mode at the end of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state is selected becomes the mode transition selection round, the mode transition as shown in FIG. The selection screen 41f is displayed. On the mode shift selection screen 41f, a normal mode forming the first mode and a delay mode forming the second mode can be selected, and the player moves a cursor imitating a finger by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Make a selection by doing

  In addition, in the interval effect of the round that may be short opening from the next time, that is, in the interval effect after the end of 4R, a round continuation effect 41g for notifying whether or not the long opening is continued from the next time is performed. . In the round continuation effect 41g, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the characters of "short" and "long" blink alternately, and the result is indicated by the finally lit character. It is reported that the opening is short due to the 16R probability change B. Further, when the short opening is notified, a promotion effect 41h is performed as an interval effect to urge the player to aim at the special variable winning device 38 as shown in FIG. 117 (b). For example, when the type of the big hit is 16R probability change A (all open long), in the round continuation effect 41g, the character of “long” is lit and it is notified that the long open is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (c), the promotion effect 41h is continued even in a short open round. Further, an emphasis effect 41i that emphasizes that the special fluctuation winning device 38 is open is performed. The highlight effect 41i is displayed as if light is being emitted from the special fluctuation winning device 38. Note that the special fluctuation winning device 38 includes a decoration means for performing decoration by light emission, and the light emission timing, the light emission intensity, the light emission color, and the like are associated with the light emission mode of the decoration means and the display mode of the highlight effect 41i. May or may not be synchronized.

  Also, when the round with the short opening is started, the short-opening acquired game ball number display 41j indicating the number of awarded balls acquired in the short opening separately from the acquired game ball number display 41d indicating the number of award balls acquired in the long opening. Is displayed. In the round number display 41a, the number of remaining releases is displayed. Here, since there are 12 remaining rounds including the round being executed and the round is opened once in each round, it is displayed as being opened 12 more times. After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (d), when the round with the short opening ends and the interval time comes, the promotion effect 41h is continued, but the highlight effect 41i that emphasizes that the special variable winning device 38 is open is Once the process ends and the next round starts as shown in FIG. 117 (e), the highlight effect 41i is restarted.

  When the final round is completed, an ending effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 117 (f) and 117 (g). In this ending effect, as shown in FIG. 117 (f), an acquired game ball number display 41d indicating the number of prize balls acquired in a long open state, and a short open acquired game ball number display 41j indicating the number of award balls acquired in a short open state. Is performed, and as shown in FIG. 117 (g), a total number display 41k for displaying the total number of prize balls acquired in the special game state is performed.

  In the ending effect, a state suggestion display 41m, which is a display indicating the probability state after the end of the special game state, is performed. The content of the state suggestion display differs depending on the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round, and as shown in FIG. 118, according to the probability state after the end of the special game state (1) to (1). The character (4) is selected according to a predetermined selection rate. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), when the normal mode of the first mode is selected, only the character (1) is selected in the high probability state and (2) in the low probability state. ) Is selected. Also, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), when the delay mode that forms the second mode is selected, the characters (1) to (4) are selected according to the selection rate according to the probability state. Has become. The probability state may be indicated not only by the character image but also by character information such as dialogue.

[Main processing]
In order to perform the above-described effects, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 119 and a timer interrupt process (not shown). As shown in FIG. 119, in the main process, first, the process at the time of starting the program is performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interruption is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

  After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, a loop process is performed as a main loop process. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on an operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in a timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, a process of changing the effect content is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process for setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and the like and accepting an operation by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating random numbers for determining details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

  Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing settings for controlling the progress of the effect and drawing commands. ) To set the preparation end of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and the processing is performed until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1/30 second for one frame), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image update (frame switching) may be performed in 1/60 second, or the image updating (frame switching) may be performed later than 1/60 second. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), an instruction to draw a screen is issued (step C17).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of the sound from the speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling the LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed. Then, an initial operation process for setting an initial operation of the movable effect device is performed (step C20), an effect mode management process for managing an effect mode is performed (step C21), and a process of clearing the WDT (step C8). Return to

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 120 shows the received command check processing in the main processing described above. In the received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands have been received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as a command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. When it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (Step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (the RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thus, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, the command (data) can be moved to make a space. In addition, the analysis of the command can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that command copying for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (Step C210; N), the process returns to Step C207. If it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing ends. As described above, in the received command check processing, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are analyzed collectively. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 121 shows a received command analysis process in the above-described received command check process. In the received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  Also, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C234). In C234; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C237). The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit middle production (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for commanding an operation related to a small hit middle production (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit command (step C237; Y), the big hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot-related command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what the stop symbol of the special figure is). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol command (step C239; Y), the symbol command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of the symbol-type command (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of single-shot type commands such as the hold number command and the error command. (Step C241). The single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. The single command includes a customer waiting demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single command (step C241; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the pre-reading symbol command (step C243). If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the pre-reading symbol-related command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol-related command processing (step C244) is performed, and the received command analyzing process ends.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the prefetching pattern command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetching variable command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; Y), the prefetch variable command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetch effect. A look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not a big hit occurs when a special-figure variation display game corresponding to a start memory (holding) in which the special-figure variation display game is not executed is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of fluctuation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability, a decoration start storage display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a mode different from the normal mode, and an effect is produced on the display device 41. It is an effect such as displaying. The pre-reading commands (pre-reading fluctuation-related commands and pre-reading design-related commands) are commands for informing in advance of a fluctuation pattern or a stop pattern corresponding to a start memory to be subjected to a pre-reading effect. It is transmitted to effect control device 300. It should be noted that ordinary variable commands and symbol commands that are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Single command processing]
FIG. 122 shows a single command processing in the above-described received command analysis processing. In this one-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information on a model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), a model setting process for rewriting the internal information to the model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and the single command processing is performed. To end.

  If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. A determination is made (step C263). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (Step C263; Y), the RAM initialization processing is performed (Step C264), and the single command processing ends. In the RAM initialization processing (step C264), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, RAM initialization scenario data is set to perform an effect when the RAM initialization is performed.

  If it is determined in step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), MODE returns to the power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has been restored from the power failure without initialization. It is determined whether it is a corresponding one (step C265). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the power failure restoration command (step C265; Y), the power failure restoration processing is performed (step C266), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the power outage restoration process (step C266), an area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and restoration screen information for displaying a power outage restoration screen is set. Furthermore, the power failure recovery scenario data is set in order to perform the effect at the time of power failure recovery.

  When it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to the power failure restoration command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demonstration command indicating the start of the customer waiting demonstration. (Step C267). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demonstration command (step C267; Y), the customer waiting demonstration processing is performed (step C268), and the single-shot system command processing ends. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set to the customer waiting demonstration, and customer waiting scenario data is set to perform a customer waiting effect.

  If it is determined in step C267 that MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demonstration command (step C267; N), it is determined whether MODE is on hold in special figure 1 (step C269). If the MODE is the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting processing for displaying the decoration start storage display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C270), the one-shot command processing ends. If it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the suspension of the special figure 1 (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the suspension of the special figure 2 (step C271). If the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271; Y), the special figure 2 hold information setting processing for displaying the decoration start storage display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C272), the one-shot system command processing ends. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes a start storage display means for displaying a start storage information display for displaying information relating to the start storage by a start storage display (decorative start storage display) corresponding to each start memory.

  If the MODE is not the special figure 2 reservation at step C271 (step C271; N), it is determined whether the MODE is probability information (step C273). If MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the single-shot command processing ends.

  If MODE is not probability information in step C273 (step C273; N), it is determined whether MODE is error / invalid (step C275). If the MODE is error / invalid (step C275; Y), an error / invalidity setting process for performing a corresponding process such as error notification is performed (step C276), and the single command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE is not error / incorrect in Step C275 (Step C275; N), it is determined whether the MODE is effect mode switching (Step C277). If MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching setting processing for performing effect mode switching processing is performed (step C278), and the single-shot command processing ends.

  If MODE is not the effect mode switching in step C277 (step C277; N), it is determined whether MODE is a symbol stop (step C279). If MODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the one-shot command processing ends. If MODE is a symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C280). In determining whether or not the command is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether or not the target of the symbol stop command is a target of a currently changing special figure.

  If the command is not a normal command (step C280; N), the single command processing ends. If the command is a normal command (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure is set to stop (step C281). If all the symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). Then, the one-shot system command processing ends. Thereby, the fluctuation display of the corresponding decorative special figure fluctuation display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating a current game state, and includes a flag indicating a state such as changing, a big hit, a small hit and the like in addition to a normal state, and an appropriate flag is set according to a situation.

[Read-ahead design command processing]
FIG. 123 shows the look-ahead symbol command processing (step C244) in the above-described received command analysis processing. In this look-ahead symbol system command process, first, it is determined whether the latest suspension information is a special figure 1 suspension (step C301). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, if the received look-ahead design related command is related to the special figure 1 hold, the command is assigned to the special figure 1 hold number. FIG. 1 Saves in the prefetching symbol command area (step C302), sets a prefetching variable command reception waiting flag (step C304), and ends the prefetching symbol command processing.

  If the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, if the received look-ahead design related command relates to the special figure 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. In the special figure 2 prefetching symbol command area (step C303), a prefetching variable command reception waiting flag is set (step C304), and the prefetching symbol command processing is ended. The reason why the look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 is that the look-ahead design command and the look-ahead variation command (the look-ahead variation pattern command) are set (pair).

[Prefetch variable command processing]
FIG. 124 shows the prefetch variation command processing (step C246) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing. In this prefetch variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch variation command reception is waiting (step C311). Here, when there is a prefetch variable command reception wait flag set in the prefetch symbol command processing described above, it is determined that reception is waiting. If it is not waiting for the reception of the prefetch variation command (step C311; N), the prefetch variation command processing ends. On the other hand, when waiting for reception of a prefetching variable command (step C311; Y), the CPU clears the flag for waiting for reception of a prefetching variable command (step C312).

  After that, in the processes of steps C313 to C316, a process of converting the prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command) received from the game control device 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control device 300 is performed. First, a process (step C313) of setting a look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of symbols on hold in the latest hold information is performed, and information on the special figure type in the start-up memory corresponding to the look-ahead variation command received this time is displayed. A MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set in accordance with the current reserved number of the special figure type.

  Next, referring to the set MODE conversion table, a sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the MODE of the prefetch variation command is acquired (step C314). Further, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and a sub-prefetch conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the prefetch variation command is obtained (step C316).

  The MODE includes information on the first half variation, but the content and time of the first half variation set based on this MODE vary depending on the number of holds at the time of the determination, so the determination at the time of the preliminary determination and the start of the special figure variation display game are started. The judgment result may be different from the judgment at the time. Therefore, in order to be able to easily and reliably perform the process of the pre-reading notice effect without being affected by the number of reservations at the time of determination, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of reservations, and It can be handled in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, there is a possibility that there is a short first-movement time depending on the situation of a hold without reach and a pending state, or a thing that has a long first-half change time regardless of the state of a hold without a reach, It is converted into MODE classified according to items to be considered in the setting of the prefetch notice effect, so that the process of the prefetch notice effect can be easily and reliably performed.

  Further, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence or absence of the reach and the type of the reach. The content of the second half change set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of suspensions at the time of determination. However, for example, even in the normal reach, the last stop symbol is set to stop before one frame of the reach symbol, the stop to stop one frame ahead, and the case of hitting. Since the ACTs corresponding to these are set, the value range is wide. For this reason, the number of ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is converted to the same ACT, thereby reducing the number of the ACTs and reducing the processing load such as a check in the process of the pre-reading advance notice effect.

  Next, it is determined whether both the converted MODE and ACT are other than 0 (step C317). If both the converted MODE and ACT are not other than 0 (step C317; N), the prefetch variation command processing ends because the command value is abnormal. On the other hand, if both the MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the prefetch variable command area corresponding to the latest pending information and the number of pending (step C318), and the MODE A pre-read command consistency check process (step C319) is performed to determine whether the combination of command and ACT (command combination) is normal.

  As a result of the prefetch command consistency check process (step C319), if the command combination is not normal (step C320; N), the prefetch variable command process ends. On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), a look-ahead lottery process (step C321) for performing lottery of the prefetch notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether or not a prefetch notice effect is generated (step C322).

  When the prefetch announcement effect does not occur (Step C322; N), the prefetch variation command processing ends. On the other hand, when the prefetch notice effect is generated (step C322; Y), is the effect that the generated prefetch notice effect (that is, the prefetch notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C321)) immediately starts? Is determined (step C323). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration start storage display displayed on the display device 41 from the current time. The effect that does not start immediately is a look-ahead announcement effect performed during the execution of the special figure change display game, and an effect that generates a specific effect or reach state continuously over a plurality of special figure change display games, The effect is to give a notice by a character appearing during display, or to be a hold change notice to change the display mode of the decoration start storage display at a timing later than the present time. As for the timing of starting the execution of such an effect that does not immediately start, if the special figure change display game is being executed, the special figure change display game ends, and the execution of the next special figure change display game starts. The timing to be performed corresponds to this.

  If the effect does not start immediately (step C323; N), the prefetch variation command processing ends. In this case, a notice is set at the start of a special figure fluctuation display game for executing a prefetch notice effect. On the other hand, if the effect is an effect that starts immediately (step C323; Y), a display corresponding to the selected prefetch notice effect is set (step C324), and the prefetch variation command processing ends.

[Symbol command processing]
FIG. 125 shows a symbol command processing (step C240) in the above-described received command analysis processing. In this symbol command processing, first, a special figure type (either special figure 1 or special figure 2) corresponding to MODE is set (step C351), and a symbol type corresponding to a combination of MODE and ACT is set. Save (step C352), and the symbol command processing ends.

  The symbol type is a category of symbols such as a missing symbol, a 16R probability variable A big hit symbol, a 16R probability variable B big hit symbol, a 16R normal A big hit symbol, a 16R normal B big hit symbol, a 4R certain variable big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and the like. It is associated with data. Since the ratio of symbols changes between Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 (the probability of change is the same), this symbol-type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and data corresponding to MODE from a plurality of symbol-type setting tables is provided. Is selected, and a symbol type corresponding to ACT is set with reference to the table.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 126 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol command processing.

  If the special figure type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable command processing ends. When the special figure type is not determined (step C361; N), that is, when the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are determined. It is determined whether there is any mismatch (step C363).

  When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation command processing ends. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means the category of the symbol, and the symbol type includes, for example, a missing symbol, a 16R probable A big hit design, a 16R probable B big hit design, a 16R normal A big hit design, a 16R normal B big hit design, a 4R probable big hit design, and a small There are hit symbols. The case where the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent is such that an effect is produced as when a symbol command of a 16R probability variation A big hit symbol is received even though a variation command (variation pattern command) of a loss is received. This means that the combination conflicts with the above (combination of the fluctuation command and the symbol type).

  In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a fluctuation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the fluctuation command is performed (step C365).

  Next, the special figure fluctuation is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, the special figure is being changed means that the special figure is being changed (during a demonstration waiting for a customer, during a big hit, or during a fanfare). Further, if the number of prefetching effects (the number of prefetching executions) is not zero, the number of prefetching effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of prefetching effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing ends.

(Variable effect setting processing)
FIG. 127 shows the variation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-described variation command processing. In the fluctuation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation without reach (step C381). If the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (step C381; Y), the first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode at that time is set (step C382). In addition, since it is a fluctuation without a reach, the symbol type is always a lost symbol, and it is not necessary to particularly refer to the symbol type here. The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and naturally varies depending on the model. Here, there are a low-probability mode, a probable change mode, a time-saving mode, a latent mode, and the like. Further, in each mode, there are provided a plurality of modes in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 are different.

  Next, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, an address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (step C383). Thus, in the case of a change without reach, it is possible to change the lottery content of the notice effect (appearance rate of each notice effect mode) appearing during each change according to the number of reservations. Thereafter, a lottery of a notice appearing during the first half change is performed using the first-half notice distribution group table (step C386).

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is not the variation without reach (step C381; N), the first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the first-half notice distribution group table address corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is obtained (step C385), and the first-half notice distribution group table is used to change the first-half notice distribution group table. Is performed (step C386).

  Next, a preliminary announcement effect of the second half change is drawn by lottery. Note that the latter half of the special figure change display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a change display in a special result mode (a special symbol combination) in which a display area other than a specific area in a plurality of rows of the special figure has a big hit). Is stopped and the variable display is performed only in the specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

  First, a second-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C387). The second-half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the second-half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the second-half advance distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired with reference to the second-half advance distribution group address table (step C388), and the second-half advance distribution group table is being used (during reach) using the second-half advance distribution group table. The lottery of the appearing notice is performed (step C389).

  Thereafter, the contents of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390), and the contents of the effect corresponding to the preliminary lottery result are determined (step C391). As a result, an effect and a notice such as a fluctuating time and main reach content of the decorative special figure fluctuating display game are determined. Further, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol is performed with reference to the determined change pattern (reach effect, etc.) of the special figure change display game and the content of the notice (step C392).

  Next, an operation alternative process of setting to operate another movable effect member in place of the movable effect member having the operation failure in the initial operation is performed (step C393). The details of the operation substitution process will be described later. Then, the display setting of the variable effect is performed (step C394), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C395). Through these processes, it is possible to execute an effect or a notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. Thereafter, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C396). In this process, a setting is made to decrease the decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure change display game.

  Then, a sound number, which is a BGM number, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C397), and a decoration special figure change (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display setting is performed (step C398). Further, in the information display device 630, in order to set the fourth symbol variation display for displaying the decoration special figure variation display game separately from the identification information variation display, the fourth symbol variation display setting corresponding to the special figure type is set. (Step C399), and the variable effect setting process ends.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 128 shows the big hit command processing (step C238) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing. In this big hit command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). If MODE is a fanfare (step C401; Y), a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare display image according to the type of big hit or small hit is performed (step C402), and the state of the P machine is changed to the fanfare. After setting (step C403), the big hit command processing ends.

  If MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. If the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the number-of-rounds display information is performed (step C405), and the state of the P machine is set during the round (step C406). The big hit command processing ends.

  If MODE is not a round (step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to an interval between rounds. If MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting effects during the interval is performed (step C408), and the state of the P machine is set during the interval (step C409), and the big hit is performed. Terminates system command processing. If MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the final round.

  If MODE is the ending (step C410; Y), for example, if a high probability state is set after the end of the special game state, screen information for notifying the high probability state is set. An ending effect setting process for setting screen information corresponding to a later gaming state is performed (step C411), the state of the P machine is set to ending (step C412), and the big hit command processing ends. If MODE is not ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether or not the received command is a special winning opening count command based on winning in the special variable winning device 38.

  If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the big hit command processing ends. If the MODE is a count (step C413; Y), a count effect setting process (step C414) for setting an effect corresponding to winning in the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the big hit command process ends.

[Count production setting processing]
FIG. 129 shows the count effect setting processing (step C414) in the above-described big hit command processing. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a short open round in which the openable time is equal to or shorter than a predetermined time (step C421). In the present embodiment, the openable time is 0.2 seconds in the short open round, and 29 seconds in the long open round.

  If it is not a short open round (step C421; N), that is, if it is a long open round, the acquired game ball number counter is updated based on the special winning opening count command (step C422), and the acquired game ball number counter is updated. The display setting of the acquired game ball number display 41d is performed based on this (step C423), and the count effect setting process ends. The acquired game ball number counter counts the number of prize balls paid out by winning in the special variable prize winning device 38 in the long open round. At step C422, an update is performed to add the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning. In step C423, the updated value is displayed.

  If the round is a short opening round (step C421; Y), the counter for the short opening pattern is updated based on the special winning opening count command (step C424), and the short opening acquisition game ball based on the counter for the short opening pattern is updated. The display setting of the number display 41j is performed (step C425), and the count effect setting process ends. The short open pattern counter counts the number of prize balls paid out by winning in the special variable prize winning device 38 in the short open round. In step C424, an update is performed to add the number of prize balls paid out based on the prize. , The updated value is displayed in step C425.

  As a result, the number of prizes to the special variable prize device 38 in the long opening and the number of prizes to the special variable prize device 38 in the short opening are separately counted and displayed. That is, the effect control device 300 includes a prize determining unit that determines whether the prize to the special variable prize device 38 is a prize in the first open mode (long open) or the second open mode (short open). Eggplant In addition, the effect control device 300 determines the number of prize balls based on winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the first opening mode (long opening) and the second opening mode (short opening) based on the winning determination by the winning determining means. And counting means for separately counting the number of prize balls based on the winning in the special variable winning device 38 in.

[Fanfare effect setting process]
FIG. 130 shows a fanfare effect setting process (step C402) in the above-described big hit command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command is a fanfare command corresponding to any of 16R probable change A, 16R probable change B, 16R normal A or 16R normal B.

  If the ACT is a jackpot fanfare (step C431; Y), the number of jackpots is updated by +1 (step C432), and the display content of the jackpot fanfare effect is determined based on the probability state and the number of jackpots (step C433). Note that the number of big hits is cleared to 0 based on a normal game state that is not a high probability state or a time saving state. That is, the number of so-called consecutive chan is counted. Thereafter, the display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined content is performed (step C434), and it is determined whether the big hit includes a short opening (step C435). If the short open is not included (step C434; N), that is, if all rounds are long open, the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process ends. If short opening is included (step C434; Y), short opening big hit information is set (step C436), hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting processing ends. .

  If the ACT is not a jackpot fanfare (step C431; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C437). That is, it is determined whether or not the fanfare command corresponds to the 4R probability change (probability). If the ACT is a probable fanfare (step C437; Y), it is determined whether it is a hit from a continuous effect that is an effect that is continuously performed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C438).

  If it is not a hit from the continuous effect (step C438; N), the display setting of the abrupt special effect corresponding to the probability state is set (step C439), and the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect is performed. The setting process ends. When the 4R probability change is made in the low probability state, the sudden special-purpose effect corresponding to the probability state becomes the high probability state after the special game state, so that the effect is notified or suggested. Further, when the 4R probability changes in the high probability state, the high probability state continues even after the special game state, so that an effect to notify or suggest that effect is performed.

  If it is a hit from the continuous production (step C438; Y), a sudden production to be executed is randomly selected from among the sudden production patterns related to the present fluctuating production (continuous production) (step C440) and determined. The display setting of the sudden guess effect is performed (step C441), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process ends. That is, in the case of the 4R change from the continuous effect, an effect related to the continuous effect is performed even in the special game state. In the case of the 4R probability change, the number of big hits may be updated by +1.

  If the ACT is not a sudden fanfare (step C437; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to a small hit. If the ACT is not a small hit fanfare (step C442; N), the fanfare effect setting process ends. If the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442; Y), it is determined whether the ACT is a hit from a continuous effect that is an effect that is continuously performed over a plurality of special figure variable display games (step C443). ).

  If it is not a hit from the continuous effect (step C443; N), the display setting of the small hit special effect corresponding to the probability state is performed (step C444), and the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447). The effect setting process ends. In the case of a small hit, there is no change in the probability state before and after the small hit. Therefore, in the small hit special effect corresponding to the probability state, an effect that informs or suggests that the probability state at the time of the small hit occurrence is maintained.

  If the hit is from a continuous effect (step C442; Y), a small hit effect to be executed is randomly selected from among the small hit effect patterns related to the current changing effect (continuous effect) (step C445). The display setting of the determined small hit effect is set (step C446), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process ends. That is, in the case of the small hit from the continuous production, the production related to the continuous production is performed even in the special game state.

  In the case of a 4R probability change or a small hit from a continuous production, when the 4R probability change or a small hit is derived (at the end of a special figure change display game that results in a sudden change or a small hit), the result mode is not clearly shown and the 4R probability change or the small hit is performed. In the special game state based on the probability change and the small hit, an effect indicating which is the special game state is performed. For example, an effect in which an enemy character and an ally character fight is performed as a continuous effect, and the battle is not yet settled when the result mode is derived. Then, in the special game state, in the case of the 4R probability change, an effect in which the ally character wins (sudden effect) is performed, and in the case of a small hit, an effect in which the enemy character wins (small hit effect) is performed.

[Round effect setting process]
FIG. 131 shows the round effect setting process (step C405) in the above-described big hit command processing. In the round effect setting process, first, the display setting of the right strike instruction is performed (step C461), and it is determined whether or not the special game state based on the small hit or the stochastic (4R certain change) is performed (step C462).

  In the case of the special game state based on the small hit or the probable collision (step C462; Y), the display setting of the small hit / probable round effect is performed (step C474), and the process proceeds to step C475. If it is not the special game state based on the small hit or the sudden hit (Step C462; N), the number of rounds is derived from the round command (Step C463), and the short open big hit information set in the case of the big hit including the short open round is set. It is determined whether or not there is (Step C464).

  If there is no short opening big hit information (step C464; N), that is, if it is the special game state of only the long opening round, the display setting of the number of rounds is performed (step C465), and the display setting of the round effect of the long opening pattern (Step C466). Next, a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the long open pattern, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating a type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C467).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the mode change selection round is a mode in which the notification mode at the end of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state can be selected (step C468). If it is not the mode transition selection round (step C468; N), the round effect setting process ends. If it is the mode transition selection round (step C468; Y), the display setting of the mode transition selection screen is performed (step C469), and the round effect setting process ends.

  On the other hand, when there is the short opening big hit information (step C464; Y), that is, when the special game state includes the short opening round, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is a predetermined value to be the short opening round (step C470). ). If the number of rounds is not the predetermined value for the short open round (step C470; N), that is, if the round is the long open round, the process proceeds to step C465.

  If the number of rounds is a predetermined value that is a short open round (step C470; Y), that is, if the round is a short open round, the display setting of the round effect of the short open pattern is performed (step C471), The number of remaining releases is calculated from the number upper limit information and the number of rounds (step C472). Then, the display setting of the remaining number of times of opening, which is the number of times of opening in the short opening (Step C473), is performed, and the display setting of the highlight effect for urging the prize to the special variable prize winning device 38 is performed (Step C475). Thereafter, a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the enhanced effect, and a decorative number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by the decorative lamp or the like, are set (step C476), and the round effect setting process ends.

  In other words, in a round with a short opening, a small hit with a short opening, or a round with a 4R certainty, an effect different from the round with a long opening is performed. As described above, the special variable prize winning device 38 makes it easier for game balls to stay in the opening / closing member 990 and can aim for a prize even when the opening is short, so that emphasis is given to urge the player to aim for a prize. An effect 41i is performed.

[Interval production setting process]
FIG. 132 shows the interval effect setting processing (step C408) in the above-described big hit command processing. In this interval effect setting process, first, a sound number, which is a BGM number of a long opening interval, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C481), and a big hit including a short opening round is set. It is determined whether there is short opening big hit information set in the case of (C482).

  If there is no short opening big hit information (step C482; N), that is, if it is the special game state of only the long opening round, the interval effect setting process is ended. In this case, the long open interval is set as shown in FIG. If there is short opening big hit information (step C482; Y), that is, if it is a special game state including a short opening round, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483). Here, the predetermined value is the number of the last round in which a long opening is performed, and is 4 in the present embodiment.

  If the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483; Y), that is, if it is a short opening round from the next time, the display setting of the round continuation notification effect is performed (step C484), and the BGM based on the round continuation notification effect is performed. (Step C485), and the interval effect setting process ends. As a result, the round continuation notification effect as shown in FIGS. 117 (a) and (b) is set.

  On the other hand, when the number of rounds is not the predetermined value (step C483; N), it is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486). If the number of rounds is not larger than the predetermined value (step C486; N), the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, the next round is the long open round, and the long open interval remains set.

  If the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486; Y), the display setting of the short opening interval is performed (step C487), and the sound number, which is the BGM number of the short opening interval, a decorative lamp, or the like is used. A decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect, is set (step C488), and the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, a short opening interval as shown in FIG. 117 (d) is set. In the short opening interval, the promotion effect 41h is performed, but the emphasis effect 41i is not performed. However, as in the round, the emphasis effect 41i may be performed, or an emphasis effect dedicated to an interval may be performed.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 133 shows the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-described big hit command processing. In this ending effect setting process, first, the jackpot type information, which is the information of the jackpot type that triggered the occurrence of the special game state this time, is loaded (step C491), and the jackpot type information and the selection rate in the first mode (step C491). The setting of the status suggestion display is performed from FIG. 118 (a)) (step C492).

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is a mode transition flag (step C493). There are a first mode and a second mode in the effect mode after the end of the special game state, and the player can select the mode. The first mode and the second mode are effect modes in which the content of the state suggestion display 41m, which is a display indicating the probability state, the effect of the special figure change display game, and the like are different. The selection of the effect mode can be performed on the mode shift selection screen 41f displayed in the mode shift selection round, and the player performs the selection by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Then, when the player selects the first mode, the mode transition flag is not set, and when the player selects the second mode, the mode transition flag is set.

  If there is no mode transition flag (step C493; N), that is, if the first mode is set, the procedure moves to step C495. In this case, the state suggestion display set in step C492 is displayed. If there is a mode transition flag (step C493; Y), that is, if the second mode is set, a state suggestion display based on the selectivity in the second mode (see FIG. 118 (b)) is set ( Step C494), and the routine goes to Step C495.

  Thereafter, the total number of acquired game balls is calculated from the acquired game ball number counter and the short open pattern counter (step C495), and the display setting of the additional effect based on the total acquired game ball number is performed (step C496). Then, the acquired game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter are reset (step C497), the short opening big hit information is reset (step C498), and the ending effect setting process ends. By the above processing, the state suggestion display 41m according to the effect mode selected by the player is performed at the end of the special game state, and the number of game balls acquired in the special game state is displayed as the total number display 41k. .

  FIG. 134 shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (c), a right-handing instruction display 41c for instructing right-handing may be displayed so as to flow from left to right on the display screen. In this case, the right-hand instruction display 41c is displayed so as to flow at a position that does not overlap the symbol display 41b that displays the big hit symbol derived in the decorative special figure variation display game. Further, the right-handed instruction display 41c may be displayed so as to flow at a position overlapping the symbol display 41b, but the right-handed instruction display 41c is displayed behind the symbol display 41b so that the symbol display 41b is always visible. State. Note that the display other than the symbol display 41b, such as the round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the highlight effect 41i, and the like may be hidden by the right strike instruction display 41c, or may not be hidden.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 134 (d) to 134 (f), a promotion effect 41h for urging the player to aim at the special variable winning device 38 may be displayed so as to flow toward the special variable winning device 38. In this case, when overlapping with the symbol display 41b for displaying the big hit symbol derived in the decorative special figure change display game, the display is made such that the promotion effect 41h flows on the back side of the symbol display 41b as shown in FIG. The symbol display 41b is always visible. Further, the promotion effect 41h may be displayed so as to flow at a position not overlapping the symbol display 41b. In addition, the round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the highlight effect 41i, the short open acquisition game ball number display 41j, etc., which are displays other than the symbol display 41b, may or may not be hidden by the promotion effect 41h. Is also good. Further, the display for operating the right-handed instruction display 41c as shown in FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (c) and the display for operating the promotion effect 41h as shown in FIGS. 134 (d) to 134 (f) are simultaneously performed. May be.

  FIG. 135 also shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), the operation unit 24 and the special fluctuation prize are provided as a promotion effect 41h that prompts the user to aim at the special fluctuation prize device 38 and a highlight effect 41i that emphasizes that the special fluctuation prize device 38 is open. The image of the device 38 may be used to instruct to turn the operation unit 24 to the right largely or to instruct the special variable winning device 38 to aim. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand. In particular, when a plurality of special variable winning devices 38 are provided, it is possible to clearly indicate which special variable winning device 38 should be aimed. In addition, the light emission mode of the actual special fluctuation winning device 38 located at the lower right of the display device 41 and the light emission mode of the image of the special fluctuation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 are synchronized, and at a glance The special fluctuation prize winning device 38 to be aimed can be identified. Of course, the light emission mode of the operation unit 24 may be similarly synchronized.

  The image may be a schematic animation or a moving image of the actual special fluctuation winning device 38. Further, in the image of the operation unit 24 and the special fluctuation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41, the display is synchronized with the light emission effect of the actual operation unit 24 and the special fluctuation winning device 38. good. Further, the images of the operation unit 24 and the special fluctuation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 may be still images.

  In addition, as for the character information and the image of the arrow included in the right strike instruction display 41c and the promotion effect 41h, a flowing display may be performed as described above. In this case, the front side of the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variable winning device 38 may be moved, or the rear side may be moved. Further, when the collective display device 50 is displayed on the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variable winning device 38, the display may be performed in synchronization with the actual display mode of the collective display device 50, or the display may not be synchronized. Is also good. When the display mode is not synchronized, any display mode may be used. For example, all display modes are turned on or off, or a specific lighting mode (a big hit such as “7” in the case of 7-segment is reminded). A specific number is lit.In the case of a group of LEDs, a big hit is associated with a specific lighting mode when a big hit occurs.

  Further, when the right-handed gaming state is started, an image for instructing to turn the operation unit 24 largely rightward or for instructing to aim at the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be displayed. . Further, when the gaming state in which the left-handed game is started, an image for instructing the operation unit 24 to turn slightly to the right or instructing the player to aim at the winning device 90 may be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), a remaining time display 41n for displaying the remaining time until the end of the final round may be performed. The end condition of the round established in the case of the short opening is almost the same as when the opening time elapses than when a predetermined number of game balls win the special variable winning device 38, and the round ends in a certain time. I do. Therefore, when the subsequent round is short open, the remaining time until the end of the final round can be calculated by integrating the time of the round until the end of the final round and the time of the interval. By displaying the remaining time in this way, it is possible to give an impression different from that in the case of notifying by the number of remaining rounds, and to improve the interest of the game. That is, the game apparatus includes a remaining time calculation unit (game control device 100 or effect control device 300) for calculating the remaining time until the end of the special game state, and can notify the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculation unit. Become.

  Note that, in the above-described embodiment, the time during which the first opening mode is continued to be in the open state is a long time that is equal to or longer than a predetermined time, and the time when the second opening mode is continuously opened is equal to or less than a predetermined time. Although the short opening has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and any opening mode may be used as long as the first opening mode and the second opening mode are different. Further, as the gaming machine, a gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on winning in the start area has been described, but other gaming machines may be used. For example, it is possible to win a prize in the auxiliary gaming machine based on a prize in the starting area, and to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on a game ball winning in the auxiliary gaming machine flowing into a specific area. A gaming machine of (old type 2) may be used.

  As described above, the game board 30 including the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the starting area (the first starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, the second starting winning port) provided in the game area 32 is provided. 97) a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on a winning of a game ball to the game ball, and a special game state advantageous to a player is generated when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In the machine 10, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and a special variable winning device 38 that is converted into an open state in a special game state, and effects related to the game are controlled. The special variation winning device 38 in the special game state includes a first release mode (long release) and a second release mode different from the first release mode. Aspect A short open), there is, effect control means, so that the second in an open manner is performed, it is feasible to promote presentation 41h prompting the firing of the game ball towards special variation winning device 38. Therefore, a decrease in the number of game balls during the special game state can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be increased.

  Further, a firing operation unit (operation unit 24) for adjusting the firing force of the game ball by the player, a display device 41 capable of displaying information related to the game, and a special variable winning device 38 are decorated with light emission. Decoration means, and the effect control means, as a promotion effect 41h, a display of an operation method of a firing operation unit necessary for setting a firing force for firing a game ball toward the special variable winning device 38; The display of the decoration mode of the special fluctuation winning device 38 by the decoration means is performed on the display device 41. Therefore, the player can easily understand the contents of the promotion effect 41h.

  In addition, a game board 30 having a game area 32 in which a game ball can flow down is provided, and a start area (a first start winning port 36, a normal variable winning apparatus 37, a second starting port 97) provided in the game area 32 is provided. In the gaming machine 10 that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on winning of a game ball and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. A special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be won, and that is converted into an open state in a special game state, and a special variable winning device in a special game state. The operation modes 38 include a first open mode (long open mode) and a second open mode (short open mode) different from the first open mode. Open mode and second open mode And a winning determination means for determining whether a winning (effect control device 300) in any of the. Therefore, the effect and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information from the winning determination means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on a prize to the special variable prize device 38, and based on a prize to the special variable prize device 38 in the first opening mode based on a prize determination by the prize determining means. A counting means (effect control device 300) for separately counting the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls based on winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the second opening mode is provided. Therefore, the effect and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information from the counting means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, there is provided an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling an effect relating to a game, and the effect control means is based on a result of counting by the counting means, and is based on a prize ball based on a winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the first open mode. The number and the number of prize balls based on winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the second opening mode can be separately notified. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the counting result which has not been notified at a predetermined timing after notifying only a part of the counting result by the counting means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on of the gaming machine will be described. The initial operation is for confirming the operation of the board effect device 44 as a movable effect device, and the content of the initial operation is set according to the state of the detection sensor before the start of the initial operation. .

[Initial operation processing]
FIG. 136 shows an initial operation process (step C20) in the above-described main process (see FIG. 119). In this initial operation process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an initial operation flag (step C101). The initial operation flag is set in a process (step C7) of saving an initial value at the time of power-on in an area to be initialized performed by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the gaming machine. That is, the flag is set when the power is turned on.

  If there is no initial operation flag (step C101; N), the process proceeds to step C108. If there is an initial operation flag (Step C101; Y), the initial operation flag is cleared (Step C102), and the state of the detection sensor is acquired (Step C103). Then, it is determined whether or not all the states of the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C104). The normal detection state is a detection state of the detection sensor in a state where the movable effect device is in the initial position, and the normal detection state is a state in which all the movable effect devices are in the initial position and when the power is turned on. Is a state in which there is no abnormality as the state of the movable effect device.

  When all the states of the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (Step C104; Y), an initial operation table for performing only the normal initial operation is set (Step C105), and an initial operation execution flag is set (Step C107). When all the states of the detection sensors are not in the normal detection state (step C104; N), an initial operation table for performing a special initial operation according to the detection state is set (step C106), and an initial operation execution flag is set. (Step C107). The initial operation table is a table in which the execution contents of the initial operation are defined, and the initial operation is executed according to the contents of this table.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether there is an initial operation execution flag (step C108). If there is no initial operation execution flag (step C108; N), the initial operation processing is ended. If there is an initial operation execution flag (step C108; Y), that is, if the initial operation is being executed, it is determined whether an abnormality has been found in the initial operation being executed (step C109). If no abnormality is found in the initial operation being executed (step C109; N), it is determined whether all the initial operations have been completed (step C113). When an abnormality is found in the initial operation during execution (Step C109; Y), an operation failure error flag corresponding to the movable effect device in which the abnormality is found is set (Step C110), and the movable effect device of the movable effect device is set. It is determined whether there is an alternative initial operation which is an initial operation performed in place of the initial operation (step C111).

  When there is no alternative initial operation (Step C111), the process proceeds to Step C113. If there is an alternative initial operation (step C111), the CPU 101 sets an alternative initial operation (step C112) and proceeds to step C113. If all the initial operations have not been completed (step C113; N), the initial operation processing ends. If all the initial operations have been completed (step C113; Y), the initial operation in progress flag is cleared (step C114), and the initial operation processing ends.

  As described above, the detection sensor for detecting the operation state is provided corresponding to each movable effect device, and the detection state (normal detection state) when each is in the initial position is the state shown in FIG. 137. is there. If all the detection sensors are in the normal detection state shown in FIG. 137 before the start of the initial operation, an initial operation table for performing only the normal initial operation shown in FIG. 140A is set, and the initial operation is performed according to this initial operation table. Will be done.

  In this initial operation, a normal initial operation in which the movable effect device is operated from the initial position to the operation completion position and then returned to the initial position is performed for each of the initial operation groups shown in FIG. Priorities are set for the respective initial operation groups. The initial operation is performed from the group A having the highest priority. When the initial operation of the group A is completed, the initial operation of the group B having the next priority is performed. Similarly, after the initial operation of group B is completed, the initial operation of group C is performed. Then, when the initial operation of the group C is completed, the initial operation ends.

  Specifically, first, as the initial operation of the group A, the initial operation of the central movable accessory unit 880 is performed. In this initial operation, the state where each center movable member is at the initial position (see FIG. 13) is changed to the state where each center movable member is moved to the operation completion position (see FIG. 14). (See Reference). After the initial operation of the group A is completed, the initial operation of the upper movable accessory unit 800 is performed as the initial operation of the group B. In this initial operation, the movable member unit 820 is moved down from the state where the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848, and the second upper movable member 860 are at the initial position (see FIG. 9) to the operation completion position. And the first upper movable member 848 is operated (see FIG. 11). Thereafter, an operation of returning to the state at the initial position (see FIG. 9) is performed.

  After the initial operation of the group B is completed, the initial operation of the first lower movable members 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 of the lower movable auditors unit 730 is performed as the initial operation of the group C. In this initial operation, the state in which the second lower movable member 770 is at the initial position (see FIG. 7A) is changed to the state in which the second lower movable member 770 is operated to the operation completion position (see FIG. 7B). Then, an operation of returning to the state at the initial position (see FIG. 7A) is performed. Furthermore, a state where the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are operated from the state where the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are at the initial position (see FIG. 6A) to the operation completion position (see FIG. 6B). Then, an operation of returning to the state at the initial position (see FIG. 6A) is performed. When the initial operation of the group C is completed, the normal initial operation is completed.

  Note that the operations of the movable effect devices included in the group B include a vertical operation of the movable member unit 820, a rotation operation of the first upper movable member 848, and a swing operation of the second upper movable member 860. However, in the group B normal initial operation, the swing operation of the second upper movable member 860 is not performed. The rotation operation of the first upper movable member 848 is an operation indicating that the player has a higher degree of expectation than the swing operation of the second upper movable member 860, and is an operation that is performed less frequently. In the normal initial operation, it is checked whether or not the operation executed in the scene where the player's expectation is the highest is executable, so that the interest of the game is not impaired in the scene.

  Further, the above-described normal initial operation is performed in order from a group including an operation having a large area overlapping the display device 41. That is, the area where the initial operation of the group A shown in FIG. 138 (a) overlaps the display device 41 is the largest, and the area where the initial operation of the group B shown in FIG. 138 (b) overlaps the display device 41 is the largest. The area where the initial operation of group C shown in (c) and (d) overlaps the display device 41 is the smallest.

  138 (d) and the initial operation of the second lower movable member 770 shown in FIG. 138 (c). The initial operation of the second lower movable member 770 having a large area overlapping with 41 is performed first. As described above, by performing the operation in which the area overlapping the display device 41 is large, when the display of the display device 41 is started after a certain period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the display content is not seen by the movable effect device. Can be prevented.

  Performing the initial operation in this order is particularly effective when a power failure occurs during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 139 shows an example of a case where a power failure occurs during execution of the special figure change display game. In this example, first, a special figure variation display game and a decoration special figure variation display game are executed, and a screen during a game as shown in FIG. 139 (b) is displayed on the display device. Here, since the variable display is being performed, the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 and the second decorative game display section 88 are in a state of being variable displayed.

  When a power failure occurs while the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed (t11), the game control apparatus 100 interrupts the running special figure fluctuation display game, performs a backup process, and resets the state when the power failure occurs. Processing for holding is performed. In addition, since the effect control device 300 does not have a backup function, the information on the currently running decorative special figure variation display game is lost. In addition, the display device 41 is not displayed during the power failure.

  Thereafter, upon recovery from the power failure (t12), the game control device 100 performs processing for restarting the game from the state at the time of the power failure based on the backed up information. Then, when the power failure is restored normally based on the backed up data, the power failure restoration command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the suspended special figure change display game is restarted (t13).

  The effect control device 300 displays the initial screen shown in FIG. 139 on the display device 41 upon restoration of the power failure (t12). In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device starts with the restoration of the power failure. Then, since it is possible to grasp that the power failure has been restored based on the reception of the power failure restoration command, a power failure restoration screen indicating that fact is displayed in FIG. 139 (d) (t13).

  When the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the game control device 100 transmits a symbol stop command to the effect control device 300. In the effect control device 300, since the information of the decoration special figure change display game is lost due to the power failure, the decoration special figure change display game cannot be restarted. The display on the screen is continued. Then, since the end of the special figure change display game can be grasped in accordance with the reception of the symbol stop command, the display of the screen during the game as shown in FIG. 139 (b) is started and the result is displayed (t14). As a result, the display also returns to the state where the game is played normally. When the stop time for displaying the result elapses, a new special figure change display game is started (t16).

  If the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the resumed special figure fluctuation display game is short, the initial operation may end (t15) after the result display timing (t14) as in this example, and the result may be displayed during the display of the result. There may be a movable effect device in front of the display device 41. However, by performing the initial operation in order from the operation in which the area overlapping with the display device 41 is large, when the result of the special figure variable display game is displayed, the area where the display device 41 is hidden by the movable effect device is reduced as much as possible. , So that the result is not obstructed. 139 (c), the information displayed on the initial screen shown in FIG. 139 (c) is the least important, and then the information on the power failure recovery screen shown in FIG. 139 (d). The importance of the result information on the in-game screen shown in FIG. 139 (b) is the highest. Therefore, the visibility of more important information can be improved by performing the initial operation in order from the operation in which the area overlapping the display device 41 is large.

  In addition, from the viewpoint of enhancing the visibility of the result of the resumed special figure variable display game, the decorative special figure variable display game display area, which is a display area of the decorative special figure variable display game located substantially at the center of the display area of the display device 41, is used. The initial operation may be performed in order from the operation in which the area overlapping the game display unit 85 is large. Here, since the initial operation of the group B shown in FIG. 138 (b) has the largest overlapping area with the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85, the initial operation has the highest priority. 138 (c) and (d) and the group A shown in FIG. 138 (a) in an order that the area overlapping the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85 becomes smaller. Is set so that the priority of is lower. Thereby, when the result of the special figure variable display game is displayed, the area where the display device 41 is hidden by the movable effect device can be made as small as possible, and it is possible to prevent the result from being visually recognized.

  In view of the above, a predetermined effect is produced in a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result. Movable effect devices that perform operations (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, A second central movable effect member 910, a third central movable effect member 920, a fourth central movable effect member 930), a display device 41 capable of displaying an image relating to a game, and an effect control means for controlling the movable effect device and the display device. (Effect control device 300), and the effect control means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on, and to perform a plurality of types of operations included in the initial operation. , So that the the operation rate is often movable performance apparatus hides the display device 41 to perform the order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information displayed when the power is turned on from being disturbed.

  In addition, a predetermined rendering operation is performed in a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on establishment of a start condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result. A movable effect device, a display device 41 capable of displaying a decoration game corresponding to the game in a predetermined area, and effect control means for controlling the movable effect device and the display device 41; It is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device, and among the plurality of types of operations included in the initial operation, the movable effect device performs the operation in which the ratio of hiding the predetermined area in the display device is large, in order. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information displayed in the predetermined area from being visually recognized when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, if there is a detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial operation, that is, if there is a movable effect device that is not at the initial position, an initial operation table that performs a special initial operation according to the detection state is set. Initial operation is performed. In this initial operation table, first, a special initial operation is performed on the movable effect device corresponding to the detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state. In the special initial operation, a return operation of returning the movable effect device not at the initial position to the initial position is performed. Then, the movable effect device that has performed the special initial operation does not normally perform the initial operation. That is, for the movable effect device that has performed the return operation, it is possible to confirm that the operation is performed by the return operation, and thus the initial operation is omitted. Can be shortened. That is, if the result of the detection by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state, the special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is performed as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

  After performing the special initial operation, the normal initial operation is performed for the initial operation group that does not include the movable effect device in which the state of the detection sensor is not the normal detection state. In addition, the initial operation group that includes the movable effect device in which the state of the detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, and the initial operation group in which the movable effect device that is not the target of the special initial operation includes the special initial operation, An initial operation other than the movable effect device that performed the operation is performed. Note that the initial operation group other than the special initial operation is not performed for the initial operation group in which the special initial operation has been performed for all the movable effect devices to which the mobile effect device belongs.

  FIGS. 140 (b) to (d) and FIG. 141 show examples of the initial operation table for performing the special initial operation. FIG. 140 (b) shows an initial operation table when the seventh detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the third center movable effect member 920 and the fourth center movable effect member 930 are not at the initial position. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a return operation of returning the third center movable effect member 920 and the fourth center movable effect member 930 to the initial position is performed. Next, a normal initial operation is performed for the group B, which is the next priority of the group A, which is the initial operation group including the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 that have performed the special initial operation.

  Thereafter, an initial operation of the group C is performed according to the priority. Then, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910, which are the movable effect devices that perform the initial operation by returning to the group A having the highest priority but do not perform the special initial operation in the group A, are described. Only the initial operation is performed. This initial operation is an operation similar to the normal initial operation, which operates from the initial position to the operation completion position and returns to the initial position. That is, in this case, the third central movable effecting member 920 and the fourth central movable effecting member 930 have a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation.

  FIG. 140 (c) shows an initial operation table when the second detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the second lower movable member 770 is not at the initial position. In this case, first, a return operation of returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position is performed as a special initial operation. Next, since the group C, which is the initial operation group including the second lower movable member 770 that has performed the special initial operation, has the lowest priority, it returns to the group A with the highest priority and performs the normal initial operation.

  Next, the normal initial operation of the group B is performed, and the initial operation is performed only for the first lower movable members 740 and 741 of the group C, which are the movable effect devices not performing the special initial operation. This initial operation is an operation similar to the normal initial operation, which operates from the initial position to the operation completion position and returns to the initial position. That is, in this case, for the second lower movable member 770, a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation is set as the initial operation.

  Since the first lower movable members 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 of the lower movable auditors unit 730 that are group C are configured to be driven by one drive source, one of the movable effect devices is provided. When the special initial operation is performed, the other movable effect device can be regarded as operable, so that the other initial operation may not be performed again. That is, in the example of FIG. 140 (c), the initial operation of the fourth lower movable members 740 and 741 in the fourth execution order may be omitted.

  FIG. 140 (d) shows an initial operation table when the fifth detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the first upper movable member 848 is not at the initial position. In this case, first, a return operation of returning the first upper movable member 848 to the initial position is performed as a special initial operation. Next, the normal initial operation is performed for the group C which has the next priority after the group B which has performed the special initial operation.

  Thereafter, the process returns to the group A having the highest priority and performs the normal initial operation. Then, among the group B, the initial operation is performed for the movable member unit 820 which is the movable effect device that has not performed the special initial operation. This initial operation is an operation similar to the normal initial operation, which operates from the initial position to the operation completion position and returns to the initial position. That is, in this case, for the first upper movable member 848, the special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation is set as the initial operation.

  When the eighth detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the second upper movable member 860 is not at the initial position, a return operation of returning the second upper movable member 860 to the initial position may be performed. . In this case, since the second upper movable member 860 does not operate in the normal initial operation, the group B performs the normal initial operation. Of course, it is not necessary to determine whether the eighth detection sensor is in the normal detection state. This is because the second upper movable member 860 only swings left and right, so that the game is not affected even if it is not at the initial position.

  When the special initial operation is performed as described above, the normal initial operation for the initial operation group having the next priority to the initial operation group including the movable effect device that has performed the special initial operation is sequentially performed. ing. After performing the initial operation for the group C having the lowest priority, the process returns to the group A having the highest priority, and the initial operation is performed according to the priority until the initial operation is performed for all the movable effect devices.

  When the plurality of movable effect devices are not at the initial position, a return operation is performed to return each of the movable effect devices to the initial position one by one. In this case, the return operations are performed one by one in descending order of the return priority in the special initial operation shown in FIG. The return priority is set in order from the one closest to the display device 41, and the first center movable effect member 900, the second center movable effect member 910, the third center movable effect member 920, 4. The order of the center movable effect member 930 is high, and the order of the farthest first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 is lower.

  FIG. 141A shows a case where the sixth detection sensor and the seventh detection sensor are not in the normal detection state, that is, the first center movable effect member 900 and the second center movable effect member 910, and the third center movable effect member 920. And an initial operation table when the fourth movable center effect member 930 is not at the initial position. In this case, first, a special initial operation (return operation) for returning the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 having the higher return priority to the initial position is performed, and after the special initial operation is completed, the return is performed. A special initial operation (return operation) of returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 having lower priorities to the initial position is performed.

  Then, the normal initial operation is performed on the group B, which is the next priority order of the group A, which is the initial operation group including the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 that performed the special initial operation last. . Thereafter, the normal initial operation of the group C is performed according to the priority order. In this case, the group A performs the special initial operation, which means that all of the movable effect devices belonging to the group A have been initially operated. Therefore, the normal initial operation for the group A is not performed. That is, in this case, for the group A, a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation is set as the initial operation.

  In FIG. 141 (b), when the seventh detection sensor and the second detection sensor are not in the normal detection state, that is, the third center movable effect member 920 and the fourth center movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 The initial operation table when not at the initial position is shown. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a special initial operation of returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 having the higher return priority to the initial position is performed, and after the special initial operation is completed, the return operation is performed. A special initial operation for returning the second lower movable member 770 having a lower priority order to the initial position is performed.

  Then, since the group C, which is the initial operation group including the second lower movable member 770 that has performed the special initial operation last, has the lowest priority, the operation returns to the group A having the highest priority and performs the initial operation. As for the group A, since the third central movable effecting member 920 and the fourth central movable effecting member 930 perform the special initial operation, the first central movable effecting member 900 and the second central movable effecting member 910 not performing the initial operation are performed. Only the initial operation of is performed.

  Next, the normal initial operation of group B is performed, and the initial operation of group C is performed. For the group C, since the return operation of returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position is performed, only the initial operation of the first lower movable members 740 and 741 not performing the initial operation is performed. That is, in this case, the third central movable effecting member 920, the fourth central movable effecting member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 perform a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation. And

  FIG. 141 (c) shows an initial operation table when the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 are not in the normal detection state, that is, when the movable member unit 820 is not at the initial position. Of the movable member units 820, the movable member unit (left), which is the drive mechanism 806 performing the left operation, and the movable member unit (right), which is the drive mechanism 806 performing the right operation, are basically operated at the same time. There is a need. Therefore, when both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 that detect these operation states are not in the normal detection state, first, as the special initial operation, the movable member unit (left) and the movable member unit (right) are used. Are simultaneously operated to return the movable member unit 820 to the initial position.

  Then, the normal initial operation is performed for the group C which is the next priority order to the group B which is the initial operation group including the movable member unit 820 that has performed the special initial operation. Thereafter, returning to the group A having the highest priority, the initial operation is performed for all the movable effect devices according to the priority, but the initial operation is not performed for the group B since the special initial operation of the movable member unit 820 is performed. The initial operation of only the first upper movable member 848 is performed. That is, in this case, for the movable member unit 820, a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation is set as the initial operation.

  FIG. 141 (d) shows an initial operation table when the third detection sensor 811 is not in the normal detection state, that is, when only the movable member unit (left) is not at the initial position. In this case, first, a return operation of returning the movable member unit (left) to the initial position is performed as a special initial operation. Next, a normal initial operation is performed for a group C having a priority order next to the group B which is the initial operation group including the movable member unit (left) that has performed the special initial operation.

  Thereafter, the process returns to the group A having the highest priority and performs the normal initial operation, and then performs the normal initial operation of the group B. Here, the special initial operation is performed for the movable member unit (left) in the group B, but the movable member unit (right) and the movable member unit (left) need to be operated at the same time. Normally, an initial operation is performed.

  That is, when one of the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 is not in the normal detection state, first, only the movable member unit (left or right) corresponding to the detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state performs the return operation. . In this case, since no special initial operation is performed on the other movable member unit (left or right), both movable member units (left and right) are included, including the movable member unit (left or right) that has performed the return operation later. ) Normally performs an initial operation.

  Although the order of return priority is set to the order closest to the display device 41, the order may be other than this. For example, when there are movable effect devices that interfere with each other, such as overlapping operation ranges, the return priority may be set so that a problem due to the interference does not occur. For example, if the two movable effect devices are not at the initial position, and if one of the movable effect devices performs a return operation first and then collides with the other movable effect device, the other movable effect device performs the return operation first. The return priority is set higher.

  Further, the return priority may be set so that the return operation is performed in order from the movable effect device in which the area overlapping the display device 41 is large. In the case of the present embodiment, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 have the largest overlapping area with the display device 41, so that the return priority is the highest. Hereinafter, the area overlapping the display device 41 in the order of the movable member unit 820, the second lower movable member 770, the third center movable effect member 920, the fourth center movable effect member 930, and the first lower movable members 740 and 741 becomes smaller. The return priority is set to be lower in this order. In this manner, when the display on the display device 41 is started, the situation in which the display contents cannot be seen by the movable effect device can be quickly eliminated.

  In addition, the return operation is performed in order from the movable effect device in which the area overlapping the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 which is the display area of the decorative special figure variable display game in which the identification information is variable displayed substantially at the center of the display area of the display device 41 is large. The return priority may be set so as to perform. In the case of the present embodiment, the movable member unit 820 has the largest area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative special figure variable display game, so that the return priority is set highest. Hereinafter, the second lower movable member 770, the first lower movable members 740 and 741, the first center movable effect member 900 and the second center movable effect member 910, the third center movable effect member 920, and the fourth center movable effect member 930 will be described. Since the area overlapping with the display area of the decorative special figure variable display game becomes smaller in order, the return priority is set lower in this order. By doing so, it is possible to quickly eliminate the situation that hinders the visibility of the decorative special figure variable display game.

  In addition, as a decorative special figure variable display game, a first decorative special figure variable display game in which identification information is displayed in a variable manner in a decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 provided substantially at the center of the display area of the display device 41, When executing the second decorative special figure variation display game in which the identification information is variably displayed on the second decorative game display section 88 provided at a position closer to the periphery of the display area than the one decorative special figure variable display game, The return priority may be set in accordance with an area that overlaps only one of the decorative special figure change display games, or the return priority is set in consideration of the area that overlaps in both decorative special figure change display games. You may do it. For example, in a case where the second decorative special figure variable display game is displayed before the first decorative special figure variable display game after the power is turned on, the return is performed according to the area overlapping only the second decorative special figure variable display game. It is preferable to set priorities.

  In addition, when the special initial operation is performed, the normal initial operation is performed for the initial operation group having the next priority to the initial operation group including the movable effect device that has performed the special initial operation. It is not something that can be done. For example, after performing the special initial operation, the initial operation may be sequentially performed according to the priority from the group A having the first priority. Further, immediately after performing the special initial operation, the initial operation may be performed for the initial operation group including the movable effect device that has performed the special initial operation. Further, the initial operation may be performed from a group having many areas overlapping with the display area 41 or from a group having many areas overlapping with the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85.

  Next, an alternative initial operation performed when an operation failure occurs during the initial operation will be described. In the present embodiment, when an operation failure occurs in the initial operation of the group B, another operation in the group B can be substituted as the initial operation.

  FIG. 142A shows a normal initial operation of the group B. In this normal initial operation, first, as step 1, the movable member unit 820 is lowered from a state where the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848, and the second upper movable member 860 are at the initial positions (see FIG. 9). (See FIG. 10). Next, as step 2, the first upper movable member 848 is rotated (see FIG. 11), and as step 3, the first upper movable member 848 is returned to the initial position (see FIG. 10). Thereafter, as a step 4, an operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position (see FIG. 9) is performed.

  In the normal initial operation of the group B, if there is an operation failure in which the movable member unit 820 does not descend to the operation completion position in step 1, the operation failure error flag of the movable member unit 820 is set and the alternative initial operation is set. . In this case, the alternative initial operation 1 shown in FIG. 142 (b) is set. In the alternative initial operation 1, first, the first upper movable member 848 is rotated in step 5, and in step 6, the first upper movable member 848 is returned to the initial position. Thereafter, an operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed as a process 7. Step 7 is performed when the movable member unit 820 operates from the initial position but does not operate until the operation completion position, and is performed when the movable member unit 820 does not operate from the initial position. Absent.

  If there is an operation failure in which the first upper movable member 848 does not rotate in the process 2 in the normal initial operation of the group B or the process 5 in the alternative initial operation 1, the operation failure error flag of the first upper movable member 848 is set. And set an alternative initial operation. In this case, the alternative initial operation 2 shown in FIG. 142 (c) is set. In the alternative initial operation 2, first, in step 8, the second upper movable member 860 is rocked, and in step 9, the second upper movable member 860 is returned to the initial position. Thereafter, as step 10, an operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed. Step 10 is not performed when an operation failure in which the movable member unit 820 does not operate from the initial position has occurred.

  If there is an operation failure in which the second upper movable member 860 does not swing in the process 8 in the alternative initial operation 2 of the group B, an operation failure error flag of the second upper movable member 860 is set and the alternative initial operation is performed. Set. In this case, the alternative initial operation 3 shown in FIG. 142 (d) is set. In this alternative initial operation 3, an operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed as a step 11. Note that this operation is not performed when an operation failure in which the movable member unit 820 does not operate from the initial position has occurred.

  If there is an operation failure in any other process, it is treated as having no alternative initial operation. For example, when there is an operation failure in which the first upper movable member 848 does not return to the initial position in the process 3 in the normal initial operation, the operation failure error flag of the first upper movable member 848 is set, but the alternative initial operation is set. Then go to step 4. If there is an operation failure in which the movable member unit 820 does not rise to the initial position in step 4 of the normal initial operation, the operation failure error flag of the movable member unit 820 is set, but the alternative initial operation is not set. In this case, the raising of the movable member unit 820 may be abandoned and the initial operation of the group C may be performed, or an error may be notified and the initial operation may be stopped. The alternative initial operation may be performed immediately when an operation failure occurs, or the alternative initial operation may be performed after retrying the operation having the operation failure several times.

  That is, when the operation of rotating the first upper movable member 848 forms the first initial operation, and the first initial operation cannot be executed normally, the second initial operation for swinging the second upper movable member 860 is performed. That is, the operation is executed. Further, when the first initial operation for rotating the first upper movable member 848 can be normally executed, the second initial operation for swinging the second upper movable member 860 is not executed.

[Operation alternative processing]
FIG. 143 shows an operation substitution process (step C393) in the above-described fluctuation effect setting process (see FIG. 127). In this operation alternative processing, when the above-described alternative initial operation is performed, it is possible to replace the operation that was malfunctioning with the alternative operation. In this operation substitution process, first, it is determined whether or not an effect operation set as an effect such as a notice effect or a variable effect has an operation failure error flag (step C501). The operation failure error flag is set corresponding to the movable member that has failed in the initial operation. The movable member for which the operation failure error flag is set cannot operate normally.

  When there is no target of the operation failure error flag in the effect operation (step C501; N), the operation substitution process ends. If the effect operation has an operation failure error flag (step C501; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an alternative operation (step C502). The alternative operation in the present embodiment corresponds to the operation of the second upper movable member 860 when the first upper movable member 848 is operable when the first upper movable member 848 is malfunctioning. In addition, when the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are malfunctioning, the operation corresponds only to moving the movable member unit 820 up and down.

  If there is an alternative operation (step C502; Y), the operation of the operation failure error flag is replaced with the alternative operation (step C503), and the operation alternative processing ends. If there is no alternative operation (step C502; N), the operation alternative process ends. In other words, when the first upper movable member 848 is malfunctioning and the effect operation for operating the first upper movable member 848 is selected, if the second upper movable member 860 can operate, the first upper movable member 848 can be operated. The operation of the second upper movable member 860 is performed instead of the operation of the upper movable member 848. In this case, if the second upper movable member 860 is also malfunctioning, an operation of only moving the movable member unit 820 up and down is performed. Further, if the movable member unit 820 also has a malfunction, the first upper movable member 848, the second upper movable member 860, and the movable member unit 820 are not operated because there is no substitute operation.

  If the operation of the movable member other than the first upper movable member 848 is malfunctioning and the operation of the movable member is selected, the operation of the movable member is not performed because there is no alternative operation. May be set as an alternative operation. For example, when the first center movable effect member 900, the second center movable effect member 910, the third center movable effect member 920, or the fourth center movable effect member 930 is malfunctioning, the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member The operation of the member 848 or the second upper movable member 860 may be set to an alternative operation. In addition, although the alternative operation is performed by the movable effect device, the alternative effect may be performed by display of the display device 41, light emission of LED, sound output, and the like.

  In addition, when there are many operation modes, the third initial operation when the second initial operation cannot be executed normally or the initial operation after that may be set. Further, the normal initial operation and the alternative initial operation are operations that may be executed in the game, but operations that are unlikely to be executed in the game may be included in the initial operation.

  Also, instead of changing the effect once set in the operation alternative process, if there is a malfunction error flag, the effect is selected using a table in which the operation corresponding to the malfunction error flag is not included in the options. You may do it.

  In view of the above, a predetermined effect is produced in a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result. Movable effect devices that perform operations (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, A second central movable effect member 910, a third central movable effect member 920, a fourth central movable effect member 930), and an effect control means (effect controller 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device; The means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on, and the initial operation includes a first initial operation and a second initial operation different from the first initial operation. Oite and are able to successfully run the first initial operation becomes possible without performing the second initial operation, if it is unable to successfully perform the first initial operation can be executed a second initial operation. Therefore, the initial operation can be simplified, the time required for the initial operation can be reduced, and the game can be started quickly.

  In addition, the first initial operation and the second initial operation are operations that can be executed in the production of a game, and the first initial operation is an operation that suggests that the player is more advantageous than the second initial operation. There will be. Therefore, it is possible to first confirm the operation of the operation indicating that the player is in an advantageous state.

  In the case where the first initial operation did not end normally in the initial operation but the second initial operation ended normally, the operation control means selects an operation corresponding to the first initial operation in the game effect. In this case, an operation corresponding to the second initial operation is performed instead of the operation corresponding to the first initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the influence on the performance of the game, and to prevent the interest of the game from lowering.

  In addition, an initial operation may not be performed for a movable effect device in which the existing position differs depending on the game state depending on the situation. For example, in the case of a movable staging device in which the operation is controlled so that the probability state, which is one of the gaming states, is at the initial position when the state is low, and is not at the initial position when the state is high. Even if it is not in the initial position when the power is turned on, if the effect control device 300 can grasp that the probability state is the high probability state, the initial operation including the special initial operation (return operation) is not performed. Then, the movable effect device may be kept at the same position. As a result, the game can be quickly restarted without the initial operation.

  The case where the probability state can be grasped as the high probability state is, for example, a case where the power failure restoration command indicating that the state has returned to the state before the power failure occurred normally is received from the game control device 100, or the information of the probability state. The case where information indicating that the state is the high probability state is received. Conversely, when the RAM initialization command is received, the probability state becomes the low probability state, so that the special initial operation is performed when the RAM initialization command is not at the initial position. The gaming state includes, besides the probability state, whether or not it is a time saving state, an effect mode, whether or not it is a latent probability change state, and the like. Regarding the movable effect devices having different positions depending on these states, when the gaming state can be grasped, the initial operation including the special initial operation is not performed, and the movable effect device is kept at the same position. You may do it.

  Further, not only the initial operation may not be performed according to the game state, but also the return priority may be changed according to the game state. That is, an initial operation table according to the game state may be provided. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first center movable effect member 900, the second center movable effect member 910, the third center movable effect member 920, and the fourth center movable effect member 930 are in the high probability state or the time reduction state. In some cases, it is arranged at the operation completion position overlapping the front side of the display device 41, and is controlled so as to temporarily return to the initial position when the reach state evolves. In addition, when the state is not in the high probability state or the time reduction state, it is arranged at the initial position, and is controlled to temporarily move to the operation completion position when the reach state evolves. In addition, since it may be arranged at the operation completion position for a long time as described above, in each central movable effect member, a magnet is provided on an end face opposed to the adjacent central movable effect member, and the magnet attracts force. Each center movable effect member is assisted to be maintained at the operation completion position.

  If each of these central movable effect members is not at the initial position before the start of the initial operation, and it is understood that it is in the high probability state or the time saving state, the return priority is set to the lowest, and this An initial operation table in which an initial operation according to the return priority is defined is selected. In this case, since each central movable production member does not need to be at the initial position, there is no problem as it is, and it is better to give priority to the return operation of other movable production devices, etc. The return priority of the center movable effect member is set to be the lowest.

  Also, if it is not possible to grasp that the state is in the high probability state or the time saving state, or if it is understood that these states are not (normal probability state and not the time saving state), the return priority is set to the highest. Then, an initial operation table in which an initial operation according to the return priority is defined is selected. In this case, each central movable effect member is in an initial position, and each central movable effect member is close to the display device 41 and has a large area to cover. The return priority of each center movable effect member is set to be the highest.

  Although the initial operation is always performed when the power is turned on, the initial operation may not be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, if a power failure restoration command is received at power-on, the power failure has been restored normally, so that there is no problem with the movable staging device so that initial operation is not performed, and a RAM initialization command is received at power-on. Only the initial operation may be performed.

  Further, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the special figure change display game and the power is restored, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure change display game restarted with the restoration of the power failure. Further, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure fluctuation display game newly started after the restoration of the power failure. In this case, the initial operation may be performed irrespective of the progress of the effect, or the initial operation may be performed in response to the progress of the effect. Further, all the initial operations may be performed in one special figure variable display game, or the initial operations may be performed in a distributed manner over a plurality of special figure variable display games. In the case where the initial operation is performed in response to the progress of the effect, a specific effect including the operation of the movable effect device such that the operation as the initial operation can be executed as the effect of the special figure variable display game is set. To Even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the special figure change display game and the power is restored, the initial operation is not performed only on condition that the power is turned on, but the special figure change display is performed after the power is turned on. When the game is executed, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure change display game.

  Further, as a special initial operation for the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial operation, an operation may be performed such that the movable effect device joins the normal initial operation from the stopped position. The normal initial operation is an operation of returning from the initial position to the initial position after operating from the initial position to the maximum operation position. Therefore, the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial operation is in a state of stopping during the process of performing the normal initial operation. Therefore, of the normal initial operation, the operation from the initial position to the position where the movable effect device is stopped may be omitted, and the remaining operation may be performed.

  Further, the detection sensor can detect that the movable effect device is at the initial position. However, the detection sensor may be capable of detecting not only the initial position but also another specific position. It may be possible to detect the position over the range, and the mode of the initial operation may be set according to the detected position. In addition, the normal detection state is the detection state when the movable effect device is at the initial position, but the detection state when the movable effect device should be present when the power is turned on may be the normal detection state. Is not necessarily the initial position.

  In addition, here, the initial operation of the board effect device 44 provided on the game board 30 has been described. However, when a movable effect device is provided on the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15, the movable effect device can also be applied. is there. Also, the pachinko gaming machine has been described, but any other gaming machine such as a slot machine can be applied as long as it has a movable effect device.

  From the above, based on the establishment of the start condition, the game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, the special game state in which the predetermined game value is given to the player is set. In the generated gaming machine, a movable effect device (a first lower movable member 740, 741, a second lower movable member 770, a movable member unit 820, a first upper movable member 848, a second upper movable member 860) which performs a predetermined effect operation. , The first center movable effect member 900, the second center movable effect member 910, the third center movable effect member 920, the fourth center movable effect member 930), and a position detecting means (first) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device. To the seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897) and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device. The stage is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on, and when the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is a predetermined normal detection state, the stage is set as a normal initial operation. Performs the operation, and if the result of detection by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state, it is possible to perform a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation as the initial operation That is, Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be reduced.

  In addition, a plurality of movable effect devices are provided, and position detecting means corresponding to each of the movable effect devices are provided, and the effect control means determines that the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is in a normal detection state. For the device, a normal initial operation is performed as an initial operation, and a special initial operation may be performed instead of the normal initial operation as an initial operation for a movable effect device in which a detection result of the position detection unit before the start of the initial operation is not a normal detection state. It is made possible. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be reduced.

  Further, when all of the detection results by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation are in the normal detection state, the effect control means causes the plurality of movable effect devices to perform the normal initial operation in a predetermined order, If at least one of the detection results obtained by the position detection means before the start of the operation is not in the normal detection state, the special effect operation is performed on the movable effect device in which the detection result obtained by the position detection means is not in the normal detection state. This means that the effect device is operated at the initial stage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as interference with other movable effect devices by operating from a movable effect device that is not in a normal position. Further, by performing the special initial operation one by one, the operation can be confirmed one by one, and it becomes easy to grasp the abnormal state.

  Further, the position detection means can detect that the movable effect device is at the initial position, a state in which the movable effect device is detected at the initial position is a normal detection state, and the effect control means is normally in the initial state. As the operation, the operation of returning from the initial position to the initial position is performed, and only the operation of returning to the initial position is performed as the special initial operation. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be reduced.

  Also, based on the establishment of the start condition, a game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed, and when a result of the game is a special result, a special game state for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated. A plurality of movable effect devices for performing a predetermined effect operation, position detecting means capable of detecting the position of each movable effect device, and effect control means for controlling the operation of the movable effect device. The means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on, and if a plurality of detection results by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation are not in the normal detection state, the detection result by the position detection means Operate such that the movable effect devices that are not in the normal detection state are in the normal detection state one by one. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the abnormal state of the gaming machine.

  Further, the display device 41 includes a display device 41 for performing an effect display related to the game. That is, the operation is performed in a predetermined order so as to operate from the movable effect device close to the device 41. Therefore, the situation that hinders the visibility of the display can be quickly eliminated. As a result, the timing at which the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 becomes visible can be advanced, and the resumption of the game can be expedited. Can be grasped quickly.

  Further, the effect control means is predetermined so as not to interfere with other movable effect devices when operating the movable effect devices that are not normally detected in the detection result by the position detection device one by one so as to be in the normal detection state. That is, the operations are performed in the order described. Therefore, the inconvenience of interfering with other movable effect devices due to the operation can be prevented.

  In addition, a display device 41 that performs an effect display related to the game is provided, and the effect control unit can display a decorative variable display game in which a plurality of identification symbols are variably displayed corresponding to the game and then the result mode is stopped and displayed. When operating the movable effect devices in which the detection result of the position detecting means is not in the normal detection state one by one in the normal detection state, the operation is performed from the movable effect device having a large range overlapping the display area of the decoration variation display game. That is, the operations are performed according to a predetermined order. Therefore, a situation that hinders the visibility of the game can be quickly resolved.

  Further, the display device 41 includes a display device 41 for performing an effect display relating to the game, and the effect control unit displays the effect when the detection result by the position detecting unit operates such that the movable effect devices that are not in the normal detection state are in the normal detection state one by one. This means that the operation is performed in a predetermined order so as to operate from the movable effect device having a large overlapping area with the device 41. Therefore, it is possible to quickly eliminate a situation that hinders the visibility of the display (such as a decorative special figure variation display game or an abnormality notification).

  Next, a description will be given of a change in the effect mode in a state where the notice effect is being executed. The effect on the display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 144 (a), at the center of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 for displaying the first decorative game among the decorative special figure variable display games. Here, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display. At the upper left of the display area, a second decoration game display section 88 for displaying a second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display section 88 includes the left area, the middle area, and the right area similarly to the first decoration game displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85. After the identification information is variably displayed, the operation is stopped and the result is displayed.

  Further, a storage display unit 83 for displaying a decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The storage display unit 83 is provided with a first storage display unit 83a that displays the first start storage and a second storage display unit 83b that displays the second start storage. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display unit 83a is one-to-one corresponding to the first start memory and is displayed side by side in the storage order. Here, there are four first start memories. It is shown that. The decorative special figure start storage display at the left end is the decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left every time the display is completed.

  In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the pre-reading such as the result of the special figure 1 change display game and the change pattern corresponding to each start memory by the display mode. In FIG. 144 (a), a look-ahead effect in which the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display is changed for the first start memory having the first, third, and fourth digestion orders is performed. Further, the second storage display unit 83b displays a decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the second start storage on a one-to-one basis, similarly to the first storage display unit 83a. Here, it is indicated that the second start memory is 0.

  On the left side of the first storage display unit 83a, there is provided an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information about the start storage corresponding to the currently executed special figure change display game. At the start of the special figure variation display game, the decoration special figure start storage display at the left end of the first storage display section 83a or the second storage display section 83b is transferred to the running storage display section 84, and the special figure to be executed is executed. The result of the change display game, the change pattern, and the like are suggested by the display mode.

  In the upper right part of the display area, a start storage number display section 86 for displaying the start storage number is provided. The number-of-starting-storages display section 86 is provided with a first-starting-storage-number display section 86a for displaying the number of first starting memories, and a second-starting-memory number display section 86b for displaying the number of second starting memories. ing. Further, an effect mode display section 89 for displaying the current effect mode is provided at the upper center of the display area. Here, the first mode of the probability change mode is shown.

  When the first start memory is exhausted and reduced from the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the first memory display unit 83a is displayed as shown in FIG. 144 (b). The display flowing into the unit 84 is performed. Here, the result of the special figure change display game, the change pattern, and the like are suggested in the storage display section during execution 84 in the same manner as the pre-reading effect. Also, in the start storage number display section 86, the numerical value of the first start storage number display section 86a is decreased by one.

  Then, in the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85, a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory is started, and is identified in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas. The variable display of information is started. In addition, in the second decoration game display section 88, a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory is started, and identification information of the identification information is displayed in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area. The variable display is started.

  Thereafter, the identification information temporarily stops in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display section 85. In the state where the vehicle is temporarily stopped, the identification information is displayed so as to fluctuate, indicating that the vehicle is not completely stopped. That is, the state of the temporary stop is equivalent to the state of the variable display. When the same identification information stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, a reach state is established and a reach effect is started. Of course, different identification information may be stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area and the reach state may not be achieved. The first half changes until the right change display area temporarily stops in the reach state, and the second half changes thereafter. If it does not reach, only the first half changes.

  When the fluctuating time is over, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the identification information of the decorative special figure fluctuating display game display section 85 is stopped, and the result mode is displayed. In the second decoration game display unit 88, during the fluctuation time, the fluctuation display of the identification information is continued in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, and with the end of the fluctuation time, the identification information is displayed in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area. After the change display of the identification information is completed, the identification information is stopped, and the result mode is displayed. In other words, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are not synchronized from the time when the identification information is temporarily stopped in one variable display area in the first decoration game until the variable display ends and the identification information stops. Become. By doing so, even when the reach effect is not performed due to the effect replacement, the process of changing the second decoration game does not need to be performed, and the process is simplified. Further, the display of the in-execution storage display unit 84 is deleted with the end of the fluctuation time. When the stop time for displaying the result mode ends, the special figure variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game are completed, and the next decorative special figure variable display game can be started.

  In this example, a mode change operation for changing the effect mode from the first mode to the second mode is performed during the fluctuation display. When the mode change operation is performed during the fluctuation display, the effect mode is changed at the timing when the running special figure fluctuation display game is finished. That is, even if the mode change operation is performed, the effect mode remains in the first mode of the probable change mode until the stop time shown in FIG. The mode is changed to the two mode, and the next special figure change display game is executed in the second mode of the certainty change mode as shown in FIG. 144 (d).

  FIGS. 144 (e) to (h) show an example in which the probable mode is changed from the second mode to the first mode. 144 (a) to (d), but in the state of FIG. 144 (h), the prefetch effect for the first start-up memory having the first digestion order is completed. Are different.

  The announcement effect of the present embodiment includes a specific announcement effect that can be executed in the same execution mode in a plurality of effect modes, but has different contents suggested by the announcement effect in each effect mode. When the effect mode is changed while the specific notice effect is being executed, the specific notice effect can be ended when a certain condition is satisfied. This fixed condition is such that the content indicated by the specific notice production in the same display mode in the changed production mode is more disadvantageous for the player than the content suggested by the specific notice production in the production mode before change. And the result of the special figure change display game based on the starting memory, which is the target of the specific notice effect, is incorrect. In other words, there is a case where the reliability of the big hit suggested by the specific notice effect becomes low due to the change of the effect mode. In such a case, since the notice gives the player the impression of being downgraded, the notice production itself is terminated.

  FIG. 145 shows the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display and the reliability of the big hit that each display mode shows in each effect mode. The big hit reliability is the probability that the result will be a special result in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the display mode. Therefore, it indicates that the higher the reliability, the higher the possibility of a special result.

  The production mode includes a low-probability mode that clearly indicates that it is not in a low-probability state and a time-saving state, a probable change mode that clearly shows that it is in a high-probability state and in a time-saving state, and a clear indication that it is in a low-probability state and in a time-saving state. And a latent mode indicating that the state is a time saving state without clearly indicating whether the state is the low probability state or the high probability state. Further, these effect modes include a first mode and a second mode.

  The low-probability mode, the probable change mode, the time saving mode, and the latency mode are selected according to the type of special result and the effect mode when the special result is derived. That is, the transition between the low-probability mode, the probable change mode, the time saving mode, and the latent mode is performed regardless of the player's intention. On the other hand, the first mode and the second mode in each effect mode are selected based on a mode selection operation (for example, operation of the effect button 25) by the player. That is, the transition between the first mode and the second mode can be performed by the player's intention.

  The white display mode 1 is a state in which the prefetching advance effect is not executed, and the other display modes 2 to 5 are states in which the prefetching advance effect is executed. The same reliability is set in any of the effect modes in the prefetch notification effect of display mode 2 indicated by a black triangle among the prefetch notification effects. Other pre-reading notice effects may have different degrees of reliability depending on the effect mode even in the same display mode. The notice effect in which the degree of reliability may differ depending on the effect mode forms a specific notice effect in which the content suggested in each effect mode is different.

  When the effect mode is changed in a state where the specific notice effect is being executed, the reliability shown in FIG. 145 is compared before and after the change, and the reliability in the effect mode after the change is compared with that before the change. Is low, and if the result of the special figure change display game based on the target start memory is incorrect, the specific notice effect is ended.

  In the example shown in FIG. 144, FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d) show a case where the first mode of the probability change mode changes to the second mode of the probability change mode. Regarding the specific announcement effect that is the display mode of the white star, the reliability in the first mode of the probable mode that is the effect mode before the change is 15%, and the second mode of the probable mode that is the effect mode after the change. The reliability in the mode is 35%. Therefore, since the reliability is increased by the change, the specific notice effect is continued even in the changed effect mode as shown in FIG. 144 (d). Note that the look-ahead notice effect indicated by a black triangle is continued in the changed effect mode because the reliability is the same in any effect mode.

  FIGS. 144 (e) to (h) show a case where the second mode of the certainty changing mode changes to the first mode of the certainty changing mode. Regarding the specific announcement effect that is the display mode of the white star, the reliability in the second mode of the probable mode, which is the effect mode before the change, is 35%, and the first mode of the probable mode, which is the effect mode after the change, is 35%. The reliability in the mode is 15%. Further, here, the result of the special figure change display game based on the starting memory, which is the target of the advance notice, is incorrect. Therefore, with the change to the effect mode after the change, the specific notice effect is ended as shown in FIG. 144 (h).

[Direction mode management processing]
FIG. 146 shows the effect mode management process (step C21) in the above-described main process (see FIG. 119). In this effect mode management process, the effect mode change based on the mode change operation by the player is managed. In this effect mode management process, first, it is determined whether or not it is an effect selectable period (step C511). The effect selectable period is a period during which the effect mode change based on the mode change operation is accepted. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the effect selectable period is a period excluding the period from when the identification information is temporarily stopped first in the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 until the stop time ends. Of course, the effect selectable period can be set arbitrarily.

  If the period is not the effect selectable period (step C511; N), the process proceeds to step C514. If it is the effect selectable period (step C511; Y), it is determined whether or not a mode change operation has been performed (step C512). If there is no mode change operation (step C512; N), the process moves to step C514. If a mode change operation has been performed (step C512; Y), a change reservation flag corresponding to the mode change operation is set (step C512), and the flow shifts to step C514.

  As described above, if the mode change operation is being performed, the effect mode is not changed until the end of the special figure change display game even if the mode change operation is performed. The flag is set. In this embodiment, the effect modes that can be changed by the mode change operation are the first mode and the second mode, and the change reservation flag also includes information indicating which effect mode is being changed. . When setting the change reservation flag, if there is a mode change operation in a state where the change reservation flag has not been set yet, the change reservation flag corresponding to the change to the effect mode different from the current effect mode is set. When a mode change operation is performed in a state where the change reservation flag is already set, the change reservation flag corresponding to the change to the effect mode different from the effect mode corresponding to the set change reservation flag is set. Set. That is, each time a mode change operation is performed, a change reservation flag corresponding to a different effect mode is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is a change reservation flag (step C514). If there is no change reservation flag (step C514; N), the effect mode management process ends. If there is a change reservation flag (step C514; Y), it is determined whether the effect mode can be changed (step C515). The state in which the effect mode can be changed is the timing at which the resulting stop time ends, or the state of waiting for a customer. If the effect mode cannot be changed (step C515; N), the effect mode management process ends. If the effect mode can be changed (step C515; Y), the effect mode corresponding to the change reservation flag is compared with the current effect mode (step C516), and it is determined whether or not they are the same. (Step C517).

  If they are the same (step C517; Y), the change reservation flag is cleared (step C520), and the effect mode management process ends. In this case, the player has performed the mode change operation an even number of times, thereby selecting the same effect mode as the current effect mode. If they are not the same (step C517; N), the effect mode corresponding to the change reservation flag is set (step C518), and a notice change process for terminating the specific notice effect is performed (step C519). Thereafter, the change reservation flag is cleared (step C520), and the effect mode management process ends. In this case, the player has performed a mode change operation an odd number of times, and thus has selected an effect mode different from the current effect mode.

[Direction mode switching setting process]
FIG. 147 shows the effect mode switching setting process (step C278) in the above-described one-shot system command process (see FIG. 122). In this effect mode switching setting process, the effect mode change by selection in the game control device 100 is managed. In this effect mode switching setting process, first, an effect mode corresponding to the command is set (step C521), and a notice change process for performing a process of terminating the specific notice effect is performed (step C522), and the effect mode switch setting process. To end.

[Notice change process]
FIG. 148 shows the notice change process (steps C519 and C522) in the above-described effect mode management process and effect mode switching setting process. In this notice change processing, first, it is determined whether or not the specific notice effect is being executed (step C531). If the specific notice effect is not being executed (step C531; N), the notice change process ends. If the specific notice effect is being executed (step C531; Y), the specific notice effect to be processed is selected (step C532). When there are a plurality of decorative special figure start storage displays executing the specific notice effect in the selection of the specific notice effect to be processed, one of the specific notice effects not performing the processing of step C533 and thereafter is set. . As a result, the processing is sequentially performed for each specific notice effect.

  Next, the reliability before and after the effect mode change is compared (step C533), and it is determined whether the reliability after the change is lower (step C534). When the reliability after the change is not lower (step C534; N), the process proceeds to step C537. In this case, the specific notice effect of the processing target is not changed. If the reliability after the change is lower (step C534; Y), it is determined whether the result is a big hit (step C535). If the result is a big hit (step C535; Y), the process moves to step C537. In this case, the specific notice effect of the processing target is not changed.

  If the result is not a big hit (step C535; N), the end of the specific notice effect is set (step C536). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the process has been performed for all the specific announcement effects (step C537). If the process has not been completed (step C537; N), the process returns to step C532. If the processing has been completed (step C537; Y), the notice change processing ends.

  In the above description, a case has been described in which the prefetch notice effect is changed in the decoration special figure start storage display, but a change may also be made to other notice effects. For example, when the effect mode is changed during the execution of the continuous announcement performed over a plurality of special figure change display games, the process of changing or ending the continuous announcement may be performed. In addition, if the effect mode can be changed along with the mode change operation even during the fluctuation time, the effect mode is also set for the notice effect that has been started after the start of the special figure fluctuation display game for the running special figure fluctuation display game. May be changed or terminated in accordance with the change of.

  In the notice change processing shown in FIG. 148, the specific notice effect of the target is ended when the result is a start memory that is out of order and the reliability after the effect mode change is lower. The specific notice effect may be ended when the decrease of the value is equal to or more than a certain value. For example, when the decrease in the value of the reliability shown in FIG. 145 before and after the change is greater than 10, the specific announcement effect is ended. As an example, when the mode is changed from the second mode to the first mode in the probability change mode, the specific notice effect is ended because the value of the display mode 3 indicated by the white star shape is 20 because the value decrease is 20. In the display mode 4 indicated by, since the value decrease is 10, the specific notice effect is continued.

  Also, the specific notice effect is ended when the reliability decreases, but the specific notice effect may be ended when the reliability increases, or in both cases, that is, when the reliability changes. Alternatively, the specific notice effect may be ended. In this case, the specific announcement effect may be terminated when the amount of change in the value of the reliability is equal to or more than a certain value, and a certain value when the reliability is high and a certain value when the reliability is low are set. Different values may be used.

  Also, when a new start memory is generated in a state where the change reservation flag has been set but the effect mode has not been changed yet by a mode change operation by the player when the mode is not changeable, A preview effect may be selected using a dedicated table during change reservation.

  For example, for the prefetch announcement effect, a selection is made in the prefetch lottery process (step C321) in the prefetch variation command process shown in FIG. 124. In this selection, a selection rate according to the current effect mode is specified. The selection is made using the selection table. As an exception to this, when there is a change reservation flag, a table dedicated to change reservation is used as the selection table.

  In this table exclusively used during the change, only some display modes can be selected. As this partial display mode, it is possible to select only the display mode having the same degree of reliability in the current effect mode and the effect mode reserved for change, so that the display mode is not changed even if the effect mode is changed. To For example, in the low accuracy mode, only the display mode 2 and the display mode 3 can be selected. In addition, only the display mode 2 can be selected in modes other than the low-accuracy mode. In addition, other display modes may be set as some of the display modes. For example, the display modes 4 and 5 with high reliability may not be selectable, or only the display mode 1 may be selectable. Is also good. Further, only the display mode 1 and the display mode 5 may be selectable.

  In addition, when there is a change reservation flag, the announcement effect may be selected by using a selection table according to the contents of the change reservation flag, instead of using the table dedicated to change. For example, when the change to the second mode is reserved in the first mode of the certainty change mode, the announcement effect may be selected using the selection table of the second mode.

  In addition, not only when there is a change reservation flag, but also when it is known that the effect mode changes due to a change in the game state, the notice effect is similarly selected using the changed effect mode selection table. You may do it. For example, in the case where the newly generated start memory in the time saving mode is the start memory executed after the end of the time saving state and is executed in the low-accuracy mode, the notice effect is performed using the low-accuracy mode selection table. select. When the effect mode changes due to a change in the game state, the effect mode before the change is set in the first mode and the second mode. For example, if the first mode of the time saving mode is at the end of the time saving state, the first mode of the low accuracy mode is set.

  In addition, although the specific notice effect can be ended with the change of the effect mode, the notice effect other than the specific notice effect may be ended with the change of the effect mode. In addition, the notice effect that has been completed due to the change of the effect mode may be resumed when returning to the original effect mode. In this case, the display may be resumed in the display mode at the time of termination, or may be resumed in the newly selected display mode.

  Also, when the effect mode is changed, both the effect effect in the effect mode before the change and the effect effect in the effect mode after the change may be displayed. In addition, the display area is divided into two parts, one of which displays the first mode to enable the notice effect in the first mode, and the other of which displays the second mode to display the notice effect in the second mode. May be executable.

  In view of the above, a game effect in which a game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition and a game machine in which a state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the game is a special result is generated. Effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the game, the effect control means is configured to select one effect mode from a plurality of effect modes and execute a game effect in accordance with the effect mode. If the effect mode is changed while the notice effect is being executed, the notice effect can be ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as inconsistency in the contents of the notice effect, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, when the production mode is changed in a state where the preliminary production is being performed, the production control unit may be configured to perform the preliminary production in the modified production mode more than the content of the preliminary production in the production mode before the change. If the content suggested by is more advantageous for the player, the announcement effect is continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and to improve the interest of the game.

  The production control means, when the production mode is changed in a state where the preliminary production is being executed, if the game to be announced in the preliminary production has a special result, the production to continue the production. It is done. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the effect control means suggests a high possibility that the game to be notified has a special result in the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and to improve the interest of the game.

  The notice effect related to the game can be executed in the same execution mode in a plurality of effect modes, but includes a specific notice effect in which the content indicated by the notice effect is different in each effect mode, and executes the specific notice effect. If the effect mode is changed in a state where the specific notice effect is changed, the specific notice effect can be ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as inconsistency in the contents of the notice effect, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification is configured to reselect a notice effect in accordance with a change in the effect mode.

[Notice change process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, a notice change process shown in FIG. 149 is performed instead of the notice change process shown in FIG. In this notice change processing, first, a start memory to be processed is selected (step C541). Here, the reselection is performed for all the start memories, but the reselection may be performed only for the specific notice effect that is being executed as in the first embodiment.

  Next, re-selection is performed with the selectivity in the changed effect mode (step C542). Then, it is determined whether the reliability of the reselected display mode is higher than that of the display mode before the effect mode is changed (step C543). If the reselected display mode has higher reliability than the display mode before the effect mode is changed (step C543; Y), the reselected display mode is set (step C545), and the process proceeds to step C546. . In this case, since the display mode is changed to a display mode with higher reliability, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player and improve the interest.

  In addition, when the reliability of the reselected display mode is not higher than that of the display mode before the effect mode is changed (step C543; N), that is, the reliability of the reselected display mode is lower or If they are the same, it is determined whether the result is a big hit (step C544). If the result is not a big hit (step C544; N), the process proceeds to step C546. If the result is a big hit (Step C544; Y), the specific notice effect that has been reselected is set (Step C545), and the routine goes to Step C546.

  If the reliability of the reselected display mode is lower or the same, the display mode displayed in the effect mode before the change is basically maintained. If the reliability of the reselected display mode is lower, no change is made because there is a possibility that the interest of the player may be reduced. However, if the result is a big hit, the display mode is changed to the reselected display mode. As a result, the fact that the display mode is changed to the display mode with low reliability is a big hit and it is definitely notified. In addition, when the same display mode is selected by the re-selection, the display mode is maintained regardless of whether or not a big hit, but the player has a sense of expectation because it includes the possibility of a big hit, Even when the display mode is not changed, a high expectation can be provided.

  Note that the display mode may be changed only when the reliability of the reselected display mode is higher without performing the determination in step C544. Alternatively, the determination in steps C543 and C544 may not be performed, and the reselected display mode may always be set.

  From the above, when the effect mode is changed, the effect control means (effect controller 300) reselects the announcement effect according to the selectivity in the effect mode after the change. This makes it possible to grasp more detailed reliability by switching a plurality of times, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, if the content suggested by the re-selected notice effect is more advantageous for the player than the content of the pre-change notice effect, the re-selected notice effect is executed. It will be.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine according to the present modification selects a notice effect at a selectivity of each effect mode regardless of the current effect mode.

  FIG. 150 shows the contents of the prefetch information storage area provided in the RAM of the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 150 (a), in the prefetch information storage area, the first start storage (special figure 1) and the second start storage (special figure 2) correspond to the start memories 1 to 4, respectively. Areas 1 to 8, which are areas for storing prefetch information, are provided. The start memories 1 to 4 show the digestion order in each special figure type. The start memory 1 having the earliest digestion order is digested in the order of the start memories 2, 3, and 4. If the start memory is exhausted in one special figure type, the information of the subsequent areas in the digested special figure type is moved up one by one and the information of the area corresponding to the start memory 4 is deleted. For example, if one first start-up memory is consumed, the information in the areas 2 to 4 is moved up one by one from the areas 1 to 3, and the information in the area 4 is deleted.

  FIG. 150 (b) shows the contents stored in each area. Each area is provided with an area for storing a prefetch result for all effect modes. Then, in the look-ahead lottery process (step C321) in the look-ahead variation command process shown in FIG. 124, based on the look-ahead information from the game control device 100 for the corresponding start memory, the announcement effect is selected at the selectivity of each effect mode. Then, the results are stored in the corresponding areas.

[Notice change process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, a notice change process shown in FIG. 151 is performed instead of the notice change process shown in FIG. In this notice change processing, first, a start memory to be processed is selected (step C551). Here, the reselection is performed for all the start memories, but the reselection may be performed only for the specific notice effect that is being executed as in the first embodiment.

  Next, the selection result about the changed effect mode is acquired (step C552). As described above, since the result of selecting the announcement effect at the selection rate of each effect mode is stored in the prefetch information storage area, the corresponding information is obtained from this. Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained display mode has higher reliability than the display mode before the effect mode is changed (step C553).

  If the obtained display mode has higher reliability than the display mode before the effect mode is changed (step C553; Y), the obtained display mode is set (step C555), and the process proceeds to step C556. In this case, the display mode is changed to a higher reliability display mode, so that the player's sense of expectation can be increased and the interest can be improved.

  Further, when the obtained display mode is not more reliable than the display mode before the effect mode is changed (step C553; N), that is, when the obtained display mode has lower or the same reliability. Determines whether the result is a big hit (step C554). If the result is not a big hit (step C554; N), the process proceeds to step C556. If the result is a big hit (Step C554; Y), the acquired display mode is set (Step C555), and the routine goes to Step C556.

  If the reliability of the acquired display mode is lower or the same, basically, the display mode displayed in the effect mode before the change is maintained. If the reliability of the acquired display mode is lower, no change is made because there is a possibility that the interest of the player may be reduced. However, when the result is a big hit, the display mode is changed to the acquired display mode. As a result, the fact that the display mode is changed to the display mode with low reliability is a big hit and it is definitely notified. Also, if the reliability of the acquired display mode is the same as before the change, the display mode is maintained regardless of whether the hit is a big hit, but the possibility of a big hit for the player is included. It has a sense of expectation, and can provide a high sense of expectation even when the display mode is not changed.

  Note that the display mode may be changed only when the reliability of the acquired display mode is higher without performing the determination in step C554. In addition, the determination in steps C553 and C554 may not be performed, and the acquired display mode may be set.

  Further, in the prefetch lottery process (step C321) in the prefetch variation command process shown in FIG. 124, the preview effect is selected at the selectivity of each effect mode, but the advance effect is selected only for the effect mode that may be changed. You may make it select. For example, the announcement effect may be selected only for the first mode and the second mode in the current effect mode. In addition, if it is known that the effect mode is changed due to a change in the game state, such as immediately before the end of the time saving state, the notice effect is also selected for the first mode and the second mode in the effect mode after the change. You may do it.

  From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is capable of acquiring and setting a pre-selected announcement effect according to the selection rate in the effect mode after the change when the effect mode is changed. Becomes This makes it possible to grasp more detailed reliability by switching a plurality of times, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, if the content of the acquired notice effect is more advantageous for the player than the content of the notice effect before the change, the acquired notice effect is executed. Become.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification is capable of performing a notice effect in which a fluctuation pattern is suggested.

  FIG. 152 (a) shows the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display and the contents of each display mode. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the system that determines the basic contents of the SP reach effect differs depending on the effect mode. For example, when SP1 reach is selected, SP1A reach of the A reach system is performed when the first mode of the low-accuracy mode is selected, and SP1B reach of the B reach system is performed when the second mode of the low-accuracy mode is selected. Is performed. SP1A reach and SP1B reach are both SP1 reach, but the production contents are different. That is, when the systems are different, the effect contents are different even if the reach type is the same.

  In the pre-reading advancement effect performed by the decoration special figure start memory display, a variation mode announcement effect for notifying the variation pattern such as the reach type of the special figure variation display game or other effect contents based on the target start memory is performed. It is possible. FIG. 152 (b) shows an example of such a variation mode notice effect. In this example, when the effect mode is the first mode of the probability change mode, an example is shown in which the first start memory indicates that the digestion order is SP1 reach for the second start memory. When the effect mode is the first mode of the probability change mode, SP1C reach is performed as SP1 reach, and thus “1C” is displayed in the fluctuation mode announcement effect. The display mode shown in FIG. 152A is used for other effect modes or when SP2 reach or SP3 reach is performed.

  When the effect mode is changed while such a change mode announcement effect is being performed, the content of the change mode announcement effect is also changed to the content in the changed effect mode. For example, in FIG. 153 (a), in the case of the first mode of the probability change mode, a change mode announcement effect indicating that the digestion order is the SP1C reach for the second start memory in the first start memory is performed. When the next game is started from this state and the mode is changed to the second mode of the probability change mode, as shown in FIG. 153 (b), the content of the change mode notification effect is notified of the SP1D reach corresponding to the changed effect mode. Is changed to

[Notice change process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, a notice change process shown in FIG. 154 is performed instead of the notice change process shown in FIG. In the notice change processing, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation mode notice effect is being executed (step C561). Then, when the variation mode notice effect is not being executed (step C561; N), the notice change process ends. In addition, when the variation mode announcement effect is being executed (Step C561; Y), the variation mode announcement effect to be processed is selected (Step C562).

  Next, the variation mode after the effect mode change is acquired (step C563), and a variation mode notice effect corresponding to the acquired variation mode is set (step C564). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the process has been performed for all the fluctuation mode announcement effects (step C565). If the process has not been completed (step C565; N), the process returns to step C562. If the processing has been completed (step C565; Y), the notice change processing ends.

  From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can select different effects according to the effect mode for the variable display game based on one start memory, and the start memory is selected in the current effect mode. When the effect mode is changed, it is possible to change the running effect notice effect that is being executed to an effect that notifies the effect selected in the changed effect mode. It will be.

  In addition, you may enable it to perform both the announcement effect as shown in FIG. 145, and the fluctuation mode advance effect as shown in FIG. In addition, the change mode announcement effect may be ended with the change of the effect mode. Further, in the case of selecting one reach type from a plurality of reach productions, such as selecting from among a plurality of reach productions as SP1 reach in one production mode, in the same manner as the first modified example, the production mode is changed. The reach effect may be reselected to change the fluctuation mode announcement effect, or the reach effect for each effect mode may be selected in advance when the start memory is generated, as in the second modification. The change mode announcement effect may be changed based on the result.

  A display mode that does not depend on the type of the effect mode may be provided in the change mode notice effect. For example, a display mode for displaying “SP1” may be provided as a display mode for notifying that SP1 is reached. In the case of such a display mode, the display mode may not be changed according to the change of the effect mode. In addition, when there is a variation pattern that performs the same effect regardless of the effect pattern as a variation pattern, a notice is given in a display mode indicating the content of the variation pattern. The display mode may not be changed according to the change.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification can restart the initial operation interrupted by the power failure after the power failure is restored.

  The gaming machine according to the present modification includes the effect control device 300 with storage means capable of retaining the stored contents even during a power failure. The storage means capable of retaining the stored contents even in the event of a power failure may be constituted by a non-volatile RAM such as FeRAM 323 capable of retaining the stored contents even without the supply of power. May be configured to be able to retain the stored contents even in the event of a power outage by supplying power from a backup power supply, similarly to the game control device 100, even in the volatile RAM 322 that cannot retain the contents.

  The storage means capable of holding the storage contents even at the time of the power failure can store at least the information of the initial operation and the operation state of the movable effect device in the initial operation. Then, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted, the interrupted initial operation can be resumed after the restoration of the power failure.

[Initial operation processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, an initial operation process shown in FIG. 155 is performed instead of the initial operation process shown in FIG. In this initial operation process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a power-on flag (step C121). In the gaming machine of the present modified example, the initial operation flag is not set in the processing (step C7) for saving the initial value at the time of power-on in the area to be initialized performed by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the gaming machine. The power-on flag is set in the. That is, the power-on flag is a flag that is set based on power-on. If there is no power-on flag (step C121; N), the process proceeds to step C101. If there is a power-on flag (step C121; Y), it is determined whether the backup information is valid (step C122).

  The storage means capable of holding the stored contents even at the time of power failure performs processing for determining whether the stored contents (backup information) are valid when the power is turned on. As a method of this determination, as in the processing in the game control device 100, a check sum at the time of power-off and a check sum at the time of power-on can be compared. If the backup information is valid, the information stored in the RAM is used as it is, and if the backup information is not valid, the RAM is initialized. In other words, the effect control device 300 constitutes a validity determining unit that determines whether the information stored in the storage unit (RAM 322, FeRAM 323) is valid at the time of restoration from power failure.

  If the backup information is valid (step C122; Y), it is determined whether there is an initial operation execution flag (step C124). If there is an initial operation execution flag (step C124; Y), the process proceeds to step C109. In this case, a power failure occurs during the execution of the initial operation, and the initial operation is interrupted. Since the information before the occurrence of the power failure is correctly held in the storage means, this information is used as it is to restart the initial operation interrupted after the restoration of the power failure. If there is no initial operation execution flag (step C124; N), the initial operation flag is set (step C125). In this case, a power failure occurs when the initial operation is not being performed, and the initial operation is performed based on the current power-on.

  On the other hand, if the backup information is not valid (step C122; N), the initial operation in progress flag is cleared (step C123), and the initial operation flag is set (step C125). In this case, since the information before the power failure occurred is not correctly stored in the storage means, the initial operation is set to be restarted even if the power failure occurred during the initial operation and the initial operation was interrupted. I do. If it is determined that the backup information is not valid in the process of checking the validity of the backup information, the storage contents of the storage means are initialized. This initialization clears the initial operation in progress flag and initializes the initial operation flag. May be set.

  The power-off time is stored as the backup information based on the information of the RTC 338, and the power-off time can be obtained in comparison with the power-on time. If the shutdown time is shorter than the predetermined time, the interrupted initial operation can be restarted.If the power-off time is longer than the predetermined time even if the backup information is valid, the initial operation is performed from the beginning. May be.

  From the above, based on the establishment of the start condition, the game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, the special game state in which the predetermined game value is given to the player is set. In the generated gaming machine, a movable effect device (a first lower movable member 740, 741, a second lower movable member 770, a movable member unit 820, a first upper movable member 848, a second upper movable member 860) which performs a predetermined effect operation. , The first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930), and an effect control means (effect controller) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device. 300), and storage means (RAM 322, FeRAM 323) provided in the effect control means and capable of retaining the stored contents even in the event of a power failure. It is configured to perform an initial operation of the motion effect device, and information of the initial operation and an operation state of the movable effect device in the initial operation can be stored in the storage unit. During the execution of the initial operation, a power failure occurs and the initial operation is performed. Is interrupted, it is possible to restart the interrupted initial operation after the restoration of the power failure. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be reduced.

  In addition, there is provided position detection means (first to seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device, and the effect control means is stored in the storage means when the power failure is restored. It is provided with a validity determining means (effect control device 300) for determining whether the stored information is valid, and the validity determining means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. When the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is a predetermined normal detection state, the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation, and the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is performed. If the device is not in the normal detection state, it is possible to perform a special initial operation in which part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation as the initial operation. It made. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be reduced.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the initial operation can be set according to the amount of movement required for the return operation.

[Initial operation processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, an initial operation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed instead of the initial operation process shown in FIG. In this initial operation processing, when there is an initial operation execution flag (step C108; Y), that is, when the initial operation is being executed, it is determined whether or not it is the completion timing of the special initial operation (step C131). The completion timing of the special initial operation is a timing at which the detection sensor is in the normal detection state by the special initial operation for returning to the initial position. When a special initial operation is performed for a plurality of movable effect devices, it is the timing when the detection sensor of each movable effect device is in the normal detection state.

  When it is not the completion timing of the special initial operation (Step C131; N), the process proceeds to Step C109. If it is the completion timing of the special initial operation (step C131; Y), it is determined whether the movement amount to the initial position is equal to or more than a predetermined amount (step C132). The number of steps required for the stepping motor operating the movable effect device to return the movable effect device to the initial position can be used for detecting the movement amount. Alternatively, the movement amount may be detected based on the time taken to return to the initial position.

  When the movement amount to the initial position is equal to or more than the predetermined amount (step C132; Y), the process proceeds to step C109. In this case, the amount of movement in the return operation is sufficient, and since the operation of the movable effect device has been confirmed by the return operation, further initial operation of the movable effect device is omitted as in the first embodiment. If the amount of movement to the initial position is not equal to or more than the predetermined amount (Step C132; N), a normal initial operation for the movable effect device is set (Step C133). In this case, the amount of movement in the return operation is not sufficient, and the normal initial operation of the movable effect device is set to be performed again.

  For example, when the third center movable effect member 920, the fourth center movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 are not at the initial position, the initial operation table of FIG. . Then, first, a special initial operation of the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is performed, and it is determined whether or not the movement amount to the initial position is equal to or more than a predetermined amount at a timing when the special initial operation is completed. .

  If the amount of movement before returning the third center movable effecting member 920 and the fourth center movable effecting member 930 to the initial position is equal to or more than a predetermined amount, the initial operation table of FIG. On the other hand, if the movement amount before returning the third center movable effecting member 920 and the fourth center movable effecting member 930 to the initial position is less than the predetermined amount, the third order of the execution order of FIG. Is changed to the one that performs the normal initial operation in the entire group A.

  Similarly, when the special initial operation is performed on the second lower movable member 770, it is determined whether the movement amount to the initial position is equal to or more than a predetermined amount at the timing when the special initial operation is completed. Then, if the movement amount before returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position is equal to or more than the predetermined amount, the initial operation table of FIG. 141B or the third center movable effect member 920 and the fourth center movable effect member 930 are displayed. The initial operation table changed by the special initial operation is used as it is. On the other hand, if the moving amount before returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position is less than the predetermined amount, the initial operation in the fifth execution order of the execution order of FIG. Change to one that normally performs the initial operation.

  In addition, when the configuration is combined with the configuration of the above-described fourth modified example, for the movable effect device in which the detection result by the position detecting unit before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state, the movable effect device is in the normal detection state from the backup information. May be calculated, and whether or not to perform the normal initial operation may be set according to the calculation result. In the fourth modified example, at least the information of the initial operation and the operation state of the movable effect device in the initial operation can be stored. The amount of operation required to enter the detection state may be calculated.

[Initial operation processing]
When combined with the fourth modification as described above, the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 157 is performed instead of the initial operation processing shown in FIG. The processing of steps C121 to C125 is the same as that of the fourth modification. In this initial operation process, when all the states of the detection sensors are not in the normal detection state (step C104; N), an initial operation table for performing a special initial operation according to the detection state is set (step C106), and then the normal operation is performed. A process for setting whether to perform an initial operation is performed.

  In this process, first, the movement amount from the backup information to the initial position is calculated for the movable effect device that performs the special initial operation (step C135). When a plurality of movable effect devices are not at the initial position, calculation is performed for each movable effect device. That is, the effect control device 300 forms a calculation unit that calculates the amount of operation required until the movable effect device is in the normal detection state based on the information stored in the storage unit.

  Next, it is determined whether all the movement amounts to the initial position are equal to or more than a predetermined amount (step C136). If all the movement amounts to the initial position are equal to or more than the predetermined amount (step C136; Y), the process proceeds to step C107. In this case, the amount of movement in the return operation is sufficient, and since the operation of the movable effect device has been confirmed by the return operation, further initial operation of the movable effect device is omitted.

  If all the movement amounts to the initial position are not more than the predetermined amount (step C136; N), that is, if the movement amount of at least one movable effect device to the initial position is not more than the predetermined amount, the movement amount is not more than the predetermined amount. It is changed to an initial operation table that also performs a normal initial operation for the movable effect devices less than (Step C137), and the process proceeds to Step C107. In this case, there is a movable effect device in which the amount of movement in the return operation is not sufficient, and the initial operation of the movable effect device is set to be performed again.

  For example, when the third center movable effect member 920, the fourth center movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 are not at the initial position, the initial operation table of FIG. . Then, the amount of movement required to return to the initial position calculated for each of the third central movable effecting member 920 and the fourth central movable effecting member 930 is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, and for the second lower movable member 770, If it is less than the predetermined amount, in the process of step C137, the initial operation in the fifth execution order in the execution order of FIG. 141 (b) is changed to the initial operation table in which the normal initial operation in the entire group C is performed. I do.

  If the backup information is not valid, the amount of movement is unknown, but in this case, the amount of movement to the initial position is considered to be less than the predetermined amount, and for the movable effect device not at the initial position. The normal initial operation is also performed after the return operation. Also, in FIG. 155, FIG. 156, and FIG. 157, the processes of steps C110 to C112 in FIG. 136 are omitted, but may be performed in the same manner as in FIG.

  From the above, based on the establishment of the start condition, the game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, the special game state in which the predetermined game value is given to the player is set. In the generated gaming machine, a movable effect device (a first lower movable member 740, 741, a second lower movable member 770, a movable member unit 820, a first upper movable member 848, a second upper movable member 860) which performs a predetermined effect operation. , The first center movable effect member 900, the second center movable effect member 910, the third center movable effect member 920, the fourth center movable effect member 930), and a position detecting means (first) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device. To the seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897) and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device. The stage is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on, and when the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is a predetermined normal detection state, the stage is set as a normal initial operation. Perform the operation, and when the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state, operate the movable effect device until the normal detection state is reached, and the amount of operation required until the normal detection state is reached Is not more than a predetermined amount, the operation is regarded as an initial operation, the normal initial operation is not performed for the movable effect device, and if the operation amount required until the normal detection state is less than the predetermined amount, This means that the normal initial operation is performed on the movable effect device after the operation is completed. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be reduced.

  In addition, a plurality of movable effect devices are provided, and a position detecting unit is provided for each of the movable effect devices, and the effect control unit is configured such that a detection result by the position detecting unit before the start of the initial operation is a normal detection state. Performs a normal initial operation as an initial operation, and for a movable effect device in which the result of detection by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state, operates the movable effect device until the normal effect state is reached, and If the amount of operation required until the state is equal to or more than the predetermined amount, the operation is not performed as the initial operation of the movable effect device and the normal initial operation is not performed on the movable effect device, and the operation is performed until the normal detection state is reached. When the required amount of operation is less than the predetermined amount, the normal initial operation is performed on the movable effect device after the operation is completed. So that the it was. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be reduced.

  Further, the effect control means includes storage means (RAM 322, FeRAM 323) capable of holding the storage contents even in the event of a power failure, and is capable of storing the operation state of the movable effect device in the storage means, and the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation. When the detection result by the above is not the normal detection state, the calculation means (production control device 300) for calculating the amount of operation required for the movable effect device to enter the normal detection state based on the information stored in the storage means, When the amount of operation calculated by is equal to or more than the predetermined amount, the operation of the movable effect device is set as an initial operation until the normal detection state is reached, and the normal initial operation is not performed on the movable effect device. When the performed operation amount is less than the predetermined amount, the normal initial operation is performed after the movable effect device is operated until the normal detection state is reached. And thus it was. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be reduced.

[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine of this modification performs an initial operation based on receiving control information from a game control unit.

[Single command processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the single-shot command processing shown in FIG. 158 is performed instead of the single-shot command processing shown in FIG. In this single command processing, if it is determined that MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing (step C262) for rewriting the internal information to model information corresponding to the command is performed. After that, the initial operation flag is set (step C141), the power-on flag is cleared (step C142), and the single command processing ends. The model designation command is a command that is always transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 first when the power of the game machine is turned on, and control information at the time of power supply that is transmitted from the game control device 100 based on the power-on. It is what makes.

  In the gaming machine according to the present modification, the initial operation flag is set in the process of saving the initial value at the time of power-on (step C7) in the area to be initialized performed by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine. Not set, but only set here. Therefore, the initial operation is performed only when the model designation command is received. When the effect control device 300 cannot receive the model designation command, the initial operation is not set in the initial operation process and the initial operation is not performed. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present modification, the initial operation flag is saved in an area to be initialized performed by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the gaming machine, and a process of saving the initial value at the time of power-on (step C7). A power-on flag indicating that the power has been turned on is set.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Also, a received command analysis process shown in FIG. 159 is performed instead of the received command analysis process shown in FIG. In the received command analysis processing, when a correct command is received, the return operation processing (step C150) is performed.

(Return operation processing)
FIG. 160 shows a return operation process (step C150) in the above-described received command analysis process. In this return operation process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a power-on flag (step C151). If there is no power-on flag (step C151; N), the return operation process is terminated. If there is a power-on flag (step C151; Y), the power-on flag is cleared (step C152), and the state of the detection sensor is acquired (step C153). It is determined whether or not there is (Step C154). Then, when all the states of the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C154; Y), the return operation processing ends. When all the states of the detection sensors are not in the normal detection state (Step C154; N), a special initial operation (return operation) of the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state is set (Step C155), and the return operation processing ends. .

  As described above, the power-on flag is a flag that is set based on the power-on of the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the gaming machine, and the model control command that the effect control device 300 first receives from the game control device 100. It is cleared when received. When the model designation command is received, the initial operation flag is set and the initial operation of the movable effect device is performed.

  However, if the effect control device 300 misses the model designation command for some reason, the initial operation flag is not set and the power-on flag remains set. When a command other than the model designation command is received in such a situation, a return operation of returning the movable effect device not at the initial position to the initial position is performed. In this way, if the model specification command is missed when the power is turned on, the initial operation is omitted and only the return operation is performed, so that the time when the game can be started normally can be prevented from being delayed by the execution of the initial operation, By performing the return operation, it is possible to prevent the movable effect device from being at an abnormal position and affecting the game.

  Although the command that triggers the return operation is all commands other than the model designation command, the command may be limited to a specific command and may be set arbitrarily. For example, the return operation process (step C150) may be performed only when predetermined control information on the special figure variable display game is received. The predetermined control information relating to the special figure variable display game includes a variable command and a symbol command which are commands transmitted at the start of the special figure variable display game.

  As described above, if the return operation is performed at the start of the special figure change display game, it is possible to prevent the movable effect device from being in an abnormal position and affecting the execution of the special figure change display game. That is, when the effect control device 300 cannot receive the model designation command and the initial operation is not performed, and when the special figure change display game is started in a state where the movable effect device is not at the initial position, the moving operation is performed. The effect device can be returned to the initial position so as not to affect the execution of the special figure change display game.

  In addition, as the predetermined control information relating to the special figure change display game, there are a symbol stop command, a command relating to an increase / decrease in the number of holdings, a command relating to the result of a prefetching process of holding, a big hit command, and the like, which can be arbitrarily selected. . When only the return operation is performed without performing the initial operation, the initial operation may be performed based on the customer waiting state. This makes it possible to perform the initial operation without affecting the execution of the special figure change display game.

  In addition, when the effect control device 300 has not received the model designation command and the initial operation has not been performed and the movable effect device is not at the initial position, and when the command related to the special figure change display game is received, In the special figure variation display game, the movable effect device or all the movable effect devices may not be operated. In this case, the operation of the movable effect device may be enabled from the next special figure variation display game by performing a return operation when returning to the initial position when it is possible to grasp that the special figure variation display game has ended. The end of the special figure change display game is grasped, for example, when a symbol stop command for the special figure change display game is received, or when a command related to the start of the next special figure change display game is received. .

  From the above, based on the establishment of the start condition, the game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, the special game state in which the predetermined game value is given to the player is set. In the generated gaming machine, game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general, and movable effect devices (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, The movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848, the second upper movable member 860, the first center movable effect member 900, the second center movable effect member 910, the third center movable effect member 920, and the fourth center movable effect member 930 ), Position detection means (first to seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device, and control from game control means. Effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device based on the information, the effect control means based on the control information at the time of power-on transmitted from the game control means based on the power-on. It is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device, and performs a normal initial operation as an initial operation when the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is a predetermined normal detection state, If the result of detection by the position detecting means before the start is not in the normal detection state, it is possible to perform a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation as the initial operation. Become. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be reduced.

  Further, if the effect control means does not receive the power-on control information transmitted from the game control means based on the power-on, it does not perform the initial operation of the movable effect device. Therefore, if the start timing of the initial operation is missed, the time until the game can be started by not performing the initial operation can be reduced.

  Further, the effect control means performs an operation of returning the movable effect device to the initial position when receiving predetermined control information regarding the game from the game control means. Therefore, when the game is started with the initial operation omitted, the movable effect device that is not at the normal position can be returned to the initial position.

[Seventh modification]
Next, a seventh variation of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the movable accessory device can operate in an operation range wider than the operation range in the game.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the second lower movable member 770 moves from the initial position shown in FIG. 161 (a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. In the effect, the robot rotates in the range from FIG. 161 (a) to FIG. 161 (b).

  In the gaming machine of this modification, the second lower movable member 770 is rotatable from the state of FIG. 161 (b) to the maximum operation position shown in FIG. 161 (c). The actual rotatable range is the range from FIG. 161 (a) to FIG. 161 (c). That is, the operation range in the production of the game is narrower than the operable range. The range from FIG. 161 (b) to FIG. 161 (c) is not one that can be turned simply because there is play in the structure, but is made to operate by the effect control device 300 controlling the motor 734. It is the range that can be rotated. In this example, reaching the maximum operation position can be detected by the second light blocking plate 773 being retracted from the detection unit of the second detection sensor 782 and the detection state changing from OFF to ON.

  In the normal initial operation of the second lower movable member 770, after operating from the initial position shown in FIG. 161 (a) to the maximum operation position shown in FIG. 161 (c), it moves to the initial position shown in FIG. 161 (a). A return operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to reliably guarantee the operation in the operation range in the production of the game by the initial operation.

  Although the second lower movable member 770 is shown here, the operating range in the game effect is also narrower than the operable range for other movable effect devices in the same manner, and the operation is performed up to the maximum operation position in the initial operation. You may do it. However, in the case of a configuration in which the first and second center movable effect members 900 and 910 and the third center movable effect member 920 and the fourth center movable effect member 930 interfere with each other when they are simultaneously operated to the maximum operation position. Sets the order of operations in the initial operation so as not to interfere.

  When the special initial operation is performed when the detection result of the second detection sensor 782 before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state (predetermined detection state), first, the operation is performed in a direction opposite to the direction of returning to the initial position. Then, after operating to the maximum operation position shown in FIG. 161 (c), it may be returned to the initial position shown in FIG. 161 (a). The operation up to the maximum operation position shown in FIG. 161 (c) in the initial operation is performed only in the special initial operation, and in the case of the normal initial operation, the operation is performed in the range from FIG. 161 (a) to (b). Is also good.

  If the result of detection by the second detection sensor 782 before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state (predetermined detection state), a special initial operation for returning to the initial position is performed. In case that it takes time to return to the initial position due to some trouble, it is equipped with measuring means to measure the time until returning to the initial position, and if the measurement result is longer than the predetermined time, then the maximum operating position It may be possible to operate up to. Here, the predetermined time is a time required to return from the maximum operation position to the initial position, and if the time is longer than this time, it is considered that a problem such as the movable effect device is caught is occurring, After returning to the position, move to the maximum operation position and check the operation. Also, in this case, when returning to the initial position and operating to the maximum operation position, the movable effect device may be operated slowly so as to reach the maximum operation position over a longer time than the above-described predetermined time. good. Note that the present embodiment is also applicable to the above-described first embodiment and other modifications in which the operation range in the production of the game matches the operation range in the initial operation.

  From the above, based on the establishment of the start condition, the game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, the special game state in which the predetermined game value is given to the player is set. In the generated gaming machine, a movable effect device (a first lower movable member 740, 741, a second lower movable member 770, a movable member unit 820, a first upper movable member 848, a second upper movable member 860) which performs a predetermined effect operation. , The first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930), and an effect control means (effect controller) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device. 300), and the movable production device can operate in a wider range than the operation range in the production of the game, and the production control means performs an initial operation of the movable production device based on power-on. Is configured, the operation range of the movable effect device in an initial operation, and thus can be widely than the operating range of the movable effect device in effect of the game. Therefore, by making the operation range of the movable effect device in the initial operation wider than the operation range of the movable effect device in the game effect, it is possible to reliably guarantee the operation in the operation range in the game effect.

  In addition, position detection means (first to seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device are provided, and detection by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is performed. If the result is not the predetermined detection state, the initial operation can be performed in an operation range wider than the operation range of the movable effect device in the effect of the game. Therefore, when the movable effect device is in an abnormal state, it can be confirmed that the operation in the operation range in the game effect is possible, and the operation in the operation range in the game effect can be reliably guaranteed.

[Eighth Modification]
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine according to the present modification can execute a plurality of types of notice effects, and the processing when the effect mode is changed differs depending on the notice effects.

  FIG. 162 shows an example of an execution mode of a notice effect in this modification. The state shown in FIG. 162 (a) is the second mode of the probability change mode, in which the special figure change display game is ended with four first start memories. Among them, when the first start memory having the fourth digestion order is generated, as an effect of suggesting or notifying the information of the special figure change display game based on the first start memory, a continuous display over a plurality of special figure change display games is performed. The execution of a continuous effect, which is an effect, has been determined.

  As this continuous effect, a symbol stop notice in which the stop result of the decorative special figure variable display game is set as a specific result mode over a plurality of special figure variable display games is determined. As another continuous effect, execution of a character notice in which the character 99 appears over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games has also been determined. The symbol stop notice and the character notice constitute a first notice effect performed in the display mode of the decorative special figure change display game.

  Furthermore, as for the first start memory having the fourth digestion order, a hold notice effect that is a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display is performed. In addition, the look-ahead effect of changing the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display is also performed for the first start memory having the first and third digestion orders. This hold notice effect is a second notice effect in which the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display is changed.

  When the next special figure change display game is started, first, a first character notice in which the character 99 appears as shown in FIG. 162 (b) is performed. Then, when the special figure variable display game ends, as a first symbol stop notice, the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game is “123” which is the specific result mode, as shown in FIG. 162 (c). Is done. In the next special figure change display game, the character notice and the pattern stop notice are continuously executed, and the second character notice in which the character 99 appears as shown in FIG. 162 (d) is performed. When the special figure variable display game ends, as a second symbol stop notice, the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game is set to “123” as the specific result mode as shown in FIG. 162 (e).

  Further, in the next special figure variation display game, the character notice and the symbol stop notice are continuously executed, and the third character notice in which the character 99 appears as shown in FIG. When the special figure variable display game is finished, as a third symbol stop notice, the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game is set to “123” which is the specific result mode as shown in FIG. 162 (g). You.

  Then, in the special figure change display game to be notified, as shown in FIG. 162 (h), the fourth character preview in which the character 99 appears is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (i), the result of the special figure change display game is derived. Here, an outlier result is derived as a result. Since the symbol stop notice is an effect performed based on the stop result, the symbol stop notice is not executed in the special figure change display game to be notified.

  162 (a) to (g), the special notice change display game based on the start memory generation from the target start memory as shown in FIGS. 162 (a) to (g). Can be continued until the start of Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 162 (h) and (i), in the special figure change display game based on the target start memory, the effect can be continuously executed in the running storage display unit 84.

  FIG. 163 shows an example in which the effect mode is changed during the execution of the first notice effect and the second notice effect. In this example, as in FIG. 162, at the time of FIG. 163 (a), it is the second mode of the probability change mode, and the state in which the special figure change display game ends with four first start memories being present. I have. Among them, when the first start memory having the fourth digestion order is generated, as an effect of suggesting or notifying the information of the special figure change display game based on the first start memory, a continuous display over a plurality of special figure change display games is performed. The execution of a continuous effect, which is an effect, has been determined. Here, execution of a character advance notice, a design stop advance notice, and a hold advance effect is determined as a continuous effect.

  Then, up to FIG. 163 (d), the announcement effect is executed as in FIG. 162 (d). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (d), the mode change operation is performed in a state where the character notice is being executed. In the gaming machine of this modification, it is possible to immediately change the effect mode even during the fluctuation display, and the effect mode is changed to the positive change mode as shown in FIG. Is changed to the first mode.

  With the change of the effect mode, the running character notice ends, and the display of the character 99 ends as shown in FIG. 163 (e). In addition, the character notice that is to be continuously executed in the subsequent special figure change display game is also ended. As shown in FIG. Will not be done. Further, the symbol stop notice is ended with the change of the effect mode, and as shown in FIG. 163 (f), the stop result at the end of the special figure variable display game is not the specific result mode “123”. It is said. In addition, the symbol stop notice that was to be continuously executed in the subsequent special figure change display game is also ended. That is, the first announcement effect performed according to the display mode of the decorative special figure change display game ends at the same time as the effect mode is changed by the mode change operation.

  On the other hand, as for the second announcement effect in which the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display is changed, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the special figure change display game next to the special figure change display game having the mode change operation is performed. Is terminated at the start of the process. Therefore, at the time of FIGS. 163 (e) and (f), the announcement effect in which the decoration special figure start storage display is set to a white star is continuously executed, and at the time of FIG. 163 (g), the announcement effect ends. The decoration special figure start memory display is a white circle. Here, as for the starting memory having the first digestion order at the time of FIG. 163 (g), the result is out of order and the reliability after the effect mode change is lower as in the first embodiment. Although the effect has been finished, it may be finished regardless of the result or the reliability. In addition, it may be possible to end all the preliminary announcement effects, or to end only the specific announcement effect.

  In the above description, regarding the symbol stop notice, the stop result of the decorative special figure variation display game is set to the specific result mode (for example, “123”), but the specific result mode is not limited to this. For example, a specific result mode may be obtained by stopping specific identification information that is not used in the display of a normal stop result, or the color of the identification information may be different from the display of the normal stop result to obtain a specific result. It is good also as an aspect. The symbol stop notice and the character notice can be executed at the same time, but only one of them can be executed.

  In addition, the preview effect according to the display mode of the special figure change display game is defined as a first advance effect, and the advance effect in which the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display is changed is defined as the second advance effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . One of the ones having different end timings of the notice effect when the mode change operation is performed is the first notice effect and the other is the second notice effect, and the type of the corresponding notice effect can be arbitrarily set. .

  In addition, the end timing of each announcement effect can be arbitrarily set other than the timing described above. For example, the hold announcement effect ends at the same time as the mode change operation, but the character effect may be executed until the end of the special figure change display game having the mode change operation. In addition, the character announcement is an announcement effect that suggests or notifies the result of the pre-reading by the preliminary determination means, but the announcement effect suggests or informs the result of the determination performed on the special image change display game at the start of the special figure change display game. There may be. Further, the character announcement is an example of an announcement effect performed during the fluctuation display, and the character announcement may not be performed.

  Also, the symbol stop notice is set to end at the same time as the mode change operation, but the timing at which the player can know that it is actually ended is the change end of the special figure change display game where the mode change operation was performed It is time, and the end time of the change of the special figure change display game can be said to be the end time of the effect. That is, in the above-described example, the character advance notice is the first advance effect that ends at the same time as the mode change operation, and the hold advance effect is the first advance effect display game next to the special view variable display game having the mode change operation. It is a second announcement effect that ends with the start, and it can be said that the symbol stop announcement is a third announcement effect that ends when the change of the special figure change display game in which the mode change operation has been performed ends.

  In the above description, the case where the second mode is changed to the first mode in the probability change mode has been described. However, the same effect mode as that of the first embodiment is provided. Termination can be similarly controlled. That is, the same control is performed when the effect mode is changed among the certainty mode, the low accuracy mode, the time saving mode, and the latent mode, or when the first mode and the second mode are changed between each effect mode. It is possible.

  In view of the above, a game effect in which a game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition and a game machine in which a state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the game is a special result is generated. Control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the game, and operation means (effect button 25, touch panel 29) capable of accepting an operation by the player, and the effect control means includes one effect from a plurality of effect modes. A mode is selected, and the effect of the game is executed in accordance with the effect mode. The effect mode can be changed in response to the mode change operation being performed by the operation means. An effect and a second notice effect different from the first notice effect can be executed, and the first notice effect can be ended simultaneously with the change of the effect mode by the mode change operation. Yes, the second announcement attraction is, so that with the start of the next game of the game there was a mode change operation can be terminated. Therefore, the mode of execution of the notice according to the effect mode can be set, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing. Further, an appropriate end timing can be set according to the execution mode of the notice effect.

  A start storage unit (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit a start memory serving as a right to execute the game based on establishment of a start condition; and a display device 41 capable of displaying information related to the game, The effect control means can display, on the display device 41, a decoration game corresponding to the game (decorative special figure change display game) and a start memory display corresponding to the start memory (decorative special figure start storing display). The first announcement effect is performed according to the display mode of the decoration game, and the second advance effect is performed according to the display mode of the start memory display. In addition, the first announcement effect is to be performed continuously over a plurality of games. Therefore, an appropriate end timing can be set according to the execution mode of the notice effect.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as described in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, but includes, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 300 effect control device (effect control means)

In the conventional gaming machine, that performs a game variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of starting conditions, the result of this game is to generate an advantageous state for the player in response to that a special result This is common (for example , see Patent Document 1).

JP 2001-198326 A

An object of the present invention is to prevent a decrease in interest in a game.

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result,
A movable staging device that performs a predetermined staging operation,
Effect control means for controlling the operation of the movable effect device,
The gaming machine, wherein the effect control means performs an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on.